LESSON 1.

VOCABULARY.
1. to f ly, f le w vo la r, vo ló 14 . t h ick esp e so ; g ru e so
2. to be lie ve , b e lie ve d cre e r, cre yó 15 . t h in de lga d o
3. to co rre ct, co rre g ir, co rrig ió 16 . b ird pá ja ro
co rre ct e d
4. to sing , sa n g can t a r, ca n tó 17 . ch ee se qu e so
5. to cat ch , ca ug ht a t rap a r, 18 . vo ice vo z
a t rap ó; cog e r, co g ió
6. sin ce d esd e q ue ; pu est o 19 . p ie ce Pe da zo .
q ue , ya qu e; a p ie ce of can d y un du lce,
7. ju st so la men t e 20 . win g a la
8. like co mo 21 . b re a st pe cho
9. rig ht co rre cto ; cie rto ; 22 . f ea t he r p lu ma
d e re ch o
10 . le f t izq u ie rd o 23 . g ro un d t ie rra , sue lo
11 . p o lite co rt é s 24 . h o rse ca b a llo
12 . p re tt y b on it o, lin do 25 . o ne wee k un a se man a
t wo we e ks do s se ma na s
th re e we e ks t re s se man a s
13 . wid e a nch o, a mp lio

IDIOMS.
1. to s tea l , s tol e ro ba r, rob ó (se h a He s tol e my book. É l ro b ó mi lib ro. (S e
lle va do e l o b je t o ) lle vó e l lib ro )
to rob, robbe d ro ba r, rob ó , (sin He robbe d a ba nk. É l ro bó u n ba n co . (S e
me n cion a r e l o b je t o ) lle vó e l d in e ro )
2. to a rri ve i n lle g a r a (pa í s o He arrived in Mexico, É l lle g ó a Mé xico,
ciu da d ) He arrived in New É l lle g ó a Nue va Yo rk.
York.
to arri ve a t lle g a r a (cua lq u ie r He arrived at school. É l lle gó a la e scue la .
lu ga r) He arrived at the É l lle g ó a la o f icina .
office.
3. to ge t ma rrie d, got ca sa rse , se ca só . (no He got ma rrie d. É l se ca só .
ma rrie d se in d ica co n qu ién )
4. to marry , ma rrie d casarse con, se casó He ma rri e d my É l se ca só con mi
con (se indica con cous i n. p rima .
quién)
5. to be ma rrie d (to) e sta r ca sa d o (co n ) He' s ma rri e d (to my É l e stá ca sa do (co n mi
si s te r). he rma na ).
6. to rai n, ra i ne d llo ve r, llo vió I t ra i ns LI ue ve
I t ra i ne d. Ll ov i ó.
I t's ra i ni ng. Es tá ll ov ie ndo
7. to s now, s nowe d n eva r, ne vó , I t snow s. Nie va .
I t snow e d. Ne vó. I t's s now i ng. Est á ne va nd o .
8. to be born n ace r Where were you born? ¿Dón de n acist e ?
9. I' m s ure . E sto y seg u ro. I w as s ure . Est ab a se gu ro .
Be s ure to bri ng i t. A seg ú rat e t ra e rlo 10 . I don' t bel i ev e i t. No lo creo .
11. how long ago did ¿Hace cuánto tiempo I studied English a Estudié inglés hace un
you study English? estudiaste inglés? year ago. año.
How long ago did you ¿Ha ce Cu á nt o t ie mp o I sa w hi m a li ttl e Lo vi ha ce u n ra to
see him? Ago indicates lo viste ? w hi l e (a s hort ti me ) (po co t ie mp o ).
an action that ended in ago.
the past
12 . to the ri ght a la d e re cha to the le ft a la izqu ie rda
EXERCISE 1. Verb Practice.
1. Hurry up.
2. Don't hurry.
3. Let's hurry.
4. Let him try.
5. Don't let him try.
6. you try, don't you?
7. you don't try, do you?
8. You're trying, aren't you?
9. you aren't trying, are you?
10. John broke the glass, didn't he?
11. John didn't break the glass, did he?
12. John is going to break the glass, isn't he?
13. John isn't going to break the glass, is he?
14. What are you killing that animal for?
15. What were you killing that animal for?
16. What was Mr. Clay killing that animal with?
17. What did Mr. Clay kill that animal for?
18. What did Mr. Clay kill that animal with?
19. What did you do that for?
20. What did you do it with?

THE FUTURE TENSE. EL TIEMPO FUTURO

Se forma el tiempo futuro ( future) con el auxiliar will , seguido del infinitivo sin la
partícula to. El auxiliar will corresponde a las terminaciones é, ás, á, émos, án.
Se forma la contracción en afirmativo uniendo el pronombre con el auxiliar will.

Afirmativo sin contracción Afirmativo con contracción

I will work Trabajaré I'll work Trabajaré
You will work Tú trabajarás you'll work Tú trabajarás
He will work Él trabajará he'll work Él trabajará
She will work Ella trabajará she'll work Ella trabajará
It will work Trabajará it'll work Trabajará
We will work Trabajaremos we'll work Trabajaremos
You will work Uds. trabajarán you'll work Uds. trabajarán
They will work Ellos trabajarán they'll work Ellos trabajarán

Negativo. La contracción negativa de will not es won't. Estudie las siguientes

formas.
I won't work No Trabajaré
You won't work Tú no trabajarás
He won't work Él no trabajará
She won't work Ella no trabajará
It won't work No Trabajará
We won't work No Trabajaremos
You won't work Uds. No trabajarán
They won't work Ellos no trabajarán

Interrogativo: orden de las palabras Interrogativo Negativo

auxiliar, sustantivo o pronombre,
verbo.
will I work? ¿Trabajaré? won't I work? ¿No Trabajaré?
will you work? ¿Tú trabajarás? won't you work? ¿Tú no trabajarás?
will he work? ¿Él trabajará? won't he work? ¿Él no trabajará?
will she work? ¿Ella trabajará? won't she work? ¿Ella no trabajará?
will it work? ¿Trabajará? won't it work? ¿No Trabajará?
will we work? ¿Trabajaremos? won't we work? ¿No
Trabajaremos?
will you work? ¿Uds. trabajarán? won't you work? ¿Uds. No
trabajarán?
will they work? ¿Ellos trabajarán? won't they work? ¿Ellos no
trabajarán?

Este tiempo se emplea en inglés cuando en español se emplea el presente para

expresar una idea que va a desarrollarse en el futuro inmediato. Ejemplos:

Will you come ¿Vendrás mañana? Bye. I’ll see you Adiós. te veré el
tomorrow? on Monday. lunes.

EL AUXILIAR SHALL
El auxiliar SHALL se usa en la forma interrogativa en la primera persona del
singular (I) y en la primera persona del plural ( we) para proponer o sugerir una
acción futura, y se traduce como el presente en español. No se usa shall en la
forma negativa. Las preguntas con shall se contestan en la forma imperativa.
Ejemplos:

Shall I bring all the books? ¿Traeré todos los libros?

Yes, bring them. No, don't bring them. Si, tráelos. No, no los traigas.
Shall we go to the movies? ¿iremos al cine?
yes, let's go to the movies. yes, go to Si vamos al cine. Si vayan al cine.
the movies.
No, let's not go to the movies. No, No, no vayamos al cine. No, no vayan.
don't go.

El auxiliar WILL debe usarse en la forma interrogativa en la primera persona del

singular y del plural cuando se pide mera información de una acción futura .
Ejemplos:

Will I have to work tomorrow? ¿Tendré que trabajar mañana?

Will we be late if we don't take a taxi? ¿Llegaremos tarde si no tomamos un
 coche?

TO THE TEACHER
The exercises in each LESSON marked Verb Practice are to be used as a verb
conjugation speak. Each exercise of this type will consist of a group of short
sentences that will serve as a model for all the verb tenses and constructions with
which the students have become familiar.
The sentences should be I) translated into Spanish so that the student will know
exactly what he is repeating in English; 2) read in English one at a time by the
teacher with emphasis placed on pronunciation and repeated in chorus by the
students; 3) read in chorus by the students until they have mastered the verb
tenses, construction, and word order.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice. Practice using the contractions in the affirmative.

1. He'll eat at Sanborns tomorrow.
2. He won't eat at Sanborns tomorrow.
3. Will he eat at Sanborns tomorrow?
4. Won't he eat at Sanborns tomorrow?
5. What time will he eat at Sanborns tomorrow?

EXERCISE 3. Verb practice.

Repeat exercise 2, using forms of the verbs take, bring, fill, change, break, steal,
buy, sell, begin, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible. Practice using shall I and shall we.

EXERCISE 4.
Fill the blanks with shall or will, as required, and translate. Use the contractions
when it is possible.
1. What time will you start home?
2. Shall I buy a loaf of bread, or do you have enough?
3. will you bring me my book tomorrow?
4. shall we go to the movies, or shall we visit John?
5. will he come early today?
6. Yes, he'll come early today, but he won’t come early tomorrow
7. I know you'll like this house, but I don't think you will want to buy it.
8. I'm sure she'll be here in a few minutes.
9. We'll go to the movies first. Then we'll go to eat.
10. They'll get up early on Saturday, but they won’t get up early on Sunday.
11. Are you sure he won’t forget to bring your book?
12. won’t he come on Wednesday?
13. She won’t see him anymore.
14. He won’t read that book, and he won’t let me read it either.
15. If you lose your book, I won’t give you mine.

EL INFINITIVO TO BE ABLE
No hay infinitivo para los auxiliares can o could . Cuando se quiere traducir el
infinitivo poder al inglés, hay que emplear el infinitivo to be able. Ejemplo:
I'm going to be Voy a poder.
able.

EL FUTURO DE CAN
Puesto que el auxiliar can existe solamente en el presente (can) y en el pasado
(could), se forma el futuro (future) de can empleando el verbo to be able . Es
decir, se tiene que emplear el auxiliar will seguido por el infinitivo to be able
sin la partícula to. Hay que emplear el infinitivo con la partícula to después de
las formas del verbo be able. Ejemplo:
He'll be able to El podrá ir.
go.
Nunca se emplea el auxiliar Shall con el futuro de be able.

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

1. He'll be able to drink two glasses of milk.
2. He won't be able to drink two glasses of milk.
3. Will he be able to drink two glasses of milk?
4. Won't he be able to drink two glasses of milk?
5. Why won't he be able to drink two glasses of milk?
EXERCISE 6. Verb Practice.
Repeat EXERCISE 5, using forms of the verbs come, go, speak, read, hear, work,
become, kill, come back, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with
each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 7.
Change these sentences to the past tense and future tense. Translate each time.
I can make a dress. I could make a dress. I’ll be able to make a
dress.
You can go to the United You could go to the You’ll be able to go to the
States. United States. United States.
He can speak English He could speak English He’ll be able to speak
well. well. English well.
She can live in Mexico. She could live in Mexico. She’ll be able to live in
Mexico.
We can sell our house. We could sell our house. We’ll be able to sell our
house.
They can give me the They could give me the They’ll be able to give
money. money. me the money.
Mr. and Mrs. Clay can Mr. and Mrs. Clay could Mr. and Mrs. Clay will be
come in the afternoon. come in the afternoon. able to come in the
afternoon.
Those men can put their Those men could put their Those men will be able to
things in that room. things in that room. put their things in that
room.
Alice can understand Alice could understand Alice will be able to
Spanish. Spanish. understand Spanish.
We can go. We could go. We’ll be able to go.

THE USE OF HOW AFTER KNOW, SHOW, TEACH, LEARN

Se emplea la palabra how antes de un infinitivo que sigue formas de los verbos
know, show, teach, learn. Ejemplo
My son knows how to Mi hijo sabe leer.
read.

EXERCISE 8.
Speak the following sentences and translate them into Spanish.
1. She taught them how to speak English.
2. Will you teach me how to pronounce these words?
3. She's going to show her sister how to make a cake.
4. Show him how to open that window.
5. Do you know how to read and write?
6. I don't know how to answer that question.
7. The girls are learning how to wash their dresses.
8. When are you going to learn how to fix the radio?

EXERCISE 9. Translate into English.

1. ¿Sabe este niño ponerse los zapatos?
2. Ud. no puede aprender a hablar inglés en unos pocos meses.
3. Enséñame a poner la televisión.
4. Mi mamá me enseñó a leer.
5. Si te enseño a hablar español, ¿me enseñas a hablar inglés?
6. Mi tío sabe hacer muchas cosas interesantes.
7. Aquel niño aprenderá a caminar muy pronto.
8. Te iba a enseñar cómo hacerlo.

TAN…COMO. AS...AS. El equivalente de tan…como en inglés es as…as.

Estudie las siguientes frases.
as big as tan grande como as dirty as tan sucio como
as blue as tan azul como as much as tanto como
as early as tan temprano como as much money tanto dinero como
as
as late as tan tarde como as many as tantos como
as cold as tan frío como as many books as tantos libros como

EXERCISE 10. Translate into English.

1. Acapulco es tan caliente como Veracruz.
2. Juan no es tan viejo como Roberto.
3. ¿No estás tan cansado como yo?
4. Este lápiz es tan largo como el otro.
5. Tu coche no corre (go) tan rápido como el mío.
6. Él es tan rico como el sr. Alberto.
7. Él come tanto como su papá.
8. No tengo tanto tiempo como Ud.
9. ¿Compraste tantas como Juan?
10. Ella llevará tantos libros como tú.

TO RAIN y TO SNOW
Rain (llover) y snow (nevar) son verbos impersonales , y por eso solamente se
pueden conjugar en la tercera persona singular. Puesto que en inglés siempre se
tiene que expresar un sujeto, se usa el pronombre it con los verbos
impersonales.

EXERCISE 11. Verb Practice.

1. It rains. 6. It rained. 11. It's raining. 15. It was 20. It's going 25. It was
raining. to rain. going to rain.
2. It doesn't 7. It didn't rain 12. it isn’t 16. It wasn't 21. It isn't 26. It wasn't
rain. raining. raining. going to rain. going to rain.
3. Does it rain? 8. Did it rain? 13. Is it raining? 17. Was it 22. Is it 27. Was it
raining? going to going to
rain? rain?
4. Doesn't it 9. Didn't it rain? 14. Isn't it 18. Wasn't it 23. Isn't it 28. Wasn't it
rain? raining? raining? going to going to
rain? rain?
5. When does it 10. When did it 19. When was it 24. When is 29. When
rain? rain? raining? it going to was it going
rain? to rain?

30. Rain. 31. It won't rain. 32. will it rain? 33. Won't it 34. When 35. Let it
rain? will it rain? rain.

EXERCISE 12 Verb Practice Repeat exercise 11, using forms of the verb snow.

TO BE BORN. NACER El verbo be born se usa solamente en tiempo pasado . Se

conjuga el verbo be, agregando born. Estudie estas oraciones.
I was born in Mexico. Nací en México.
Where were you born? ¿Dónde naciste?
When were you born? ¿Cuándo naciste?
He was born in the United States. El nació en los Estados Unidos.
He was born in 1920. El nació en 1920.

EXERCISE 13. Translate into Spanish.

1. I wanted to buy some curtains for the bedroom, but there weren't any left when I
got to the store.
2. If I can't see Mr. Lake tomorrow, I'm going to give up.
3. It was raining very hard when I came home.
4. Does it ever snow in Mexico?
5. His wife is as pretty as his sister.
6. If you have a lot of time, why don't you speak?
7. There was plenty of rain last year, but there wasn't enough this year.
8. There's a great deal of time left before the movie starts.
9. He said there wasn't any more room in the bus, but I don't believe it.
10. That old man was born in Texas eighty-five years ago.
11. He was here a little while ago, but I didn't see him.
12. A long time ago, when I was a little boy, we lived in New York.
13. Be sure to bring your book on Friday.
14. It was raining a short time ago, but it isn't raining now.
15. Since there was no room in the car, we had to walk.

EXERCISE 14. Verb Practice

1. Why doesn't Miss Davis get married?
2. Miss Davis got married in New York.
3. Miss Davis didn't get married in New York.
4. Did Miss Davis get married in New York?
5. Didn't Miss Davis get married in New York?
6. Why didn't Miss Davis get married in New York?
7. Miss Davis is going to get married tomorrow.
8. Miss Davis isn't going to get married tomorrow.
9. Is Miss Davis going to get married tomorrow?
10. Isn't Miss Davis going to get married tomorrow?
11. Why isn't Miss Davis going to get married tomorrow?
12. Miss Davis wanted to get married a week ago.
13. Miss Davis didn't want to get married a week ago.
14. Did Miss Davis want to get married a week ago?
15. Didn't Miss Davis want to get married a week ago?
16. Why didn't Miss Davis want to get married a week ago?
17. Miss Davis can marry him the day after tomorrow.
18. Miss Davis can't marry him the day after tomorrow.
19. Can Miss Davis marry him the day after tomorrow?
20. Can't Miss Davis marry him the day after tomorrow?
21. Why can't Miss Davis marry him the day after tomorrow?
22. Miss Davis will be able to marry him soon.
23. Miss Davis won't be able to marry him soon.
24. Will Miss Davis be able to marry him soon?
25. Won't Miss Davis be able to marry him soon?
26. Why won't Miss Davis be able to marry him soon?
27. Miss Davis will marry him in June.
28. Miss Davis won't marry him in June.
29. Will Miss Davis marry him in June?
30. Won't Miss Davis marry him in June?
31. Why won't Miss Davis marry him in June?

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.

Repeat EXERCISE 14, using forms of the verbs steal, rob, fly, believe, sing, catch,
arrive (in, at), correct. in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible. Practice using shall I and
shall we.

EXERCISE 16 Read and translate.

THE FOX AND THE CROW
One day a crow stole a piece of cheese from a farmer's table and flew with it to the
top of a tall tree, where he was going to eat it. A fox saw the crow steal the cheese
and fly away (volar) with it. "If I can think of a way," said the fox, "I'll have cheese
for supper". So, as the fox sat under the tree, he began to speak to the crow in a
very polite way. "Good morning, Mr. crow," he said. "The feathers on your wings and
on your breast are very black and very pretty today. I didn't hear your voice when all
the birds were singing, but I'm sure that you have a very beautiful voice". The crow
was very happy to hear the fox say these words, and he believed everything he
heard . He liked what the fox said about his voice because the other birds
sometimes told him that he couldn't sing very well. I'll try to sing again," thought the
crow, "because I'm sure that what the fox says is right. I believe that my voice is
very beautiful." So, the crow opened his mouth very wide (mucho) and started to
sing. The piece of cheese dropped out of the crow's mouth, and the fox caught it
before it reached the ground. In a minute there was nothing left of the cheese. As
the fox walked away (se fue), he said to the crow, "The next time when someone
tells you how beautiful you sing, don't believe everything you hear ”.

EXERCISE 17. Write in English.

1. ¿Vienes mañana o paso por tu casa?
2. ¿Naciste en Veracruz?
3. Puesto que mi mamá no puede venir a México este año, creo que la visitaré el
próximo año.
4. Él se fue a Acapulco tan pronto como se casó.
5. ¿Estaba lloviendo cuando llegaste?
6. Mire Ud. a la derecha y a la izquierda.
7. Puesto que estaré en Acapulco quince días, sólo voy a llevar poco dinero.
8. Estoy seguro de que Ud. va a ser muy feliz en Estados Unidos.
9. Mi mamá no creerá que me casé hasta que vea (sees) a mi mujer.
10. Ellos no podrán comprar un coche tan grande como el nuestro.
11. ¿Vamos a la casa de Juan? (sugiriendo) Si, vamos (vayamos) en la tarde.
12. ¿Llevo el dinero conmigo? (sugiriendo) No, no lo lleves.
EXERCISE 18
Dictation.
1. Don't eat that bread because I dropped it on the ground.
2. I visited Veracruz a long time ago.
3. Your suit is like mine.
4. He was born in California, but he lives in Texas now.
5. I saw that movie about three months ago.
6. If you bring the meat and cheese, we'll be able to eat by twelve o'clock.
7. We're sure that you'll like Mexico a lot.
8. Why won't they believe you?
9. Shall we go to the movies now or wait until tomorrow?
10. We won't be able to go on Wednesday it it's raining.

EXERCISE 19
Conversation Answer the following question.
1. Where were you born?
2. When were you born?
3. how long ago did it rain?
4. how long ago did she leave?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
Questions beginning with shall are answered in the imperative.
5. Is it raining?
6. Was it raining?
7. Is it going to rain?
8. Are you sure?
9. Were you born in June?
10. Were you born in Mexico?
11. Did he leave an hour ago?
12. Did you see him a little while ago?
13. Did you know him a long time ago?
14. Will you go with me?
15. Will you do me a favor?
16. Will we eat soon?
17. Will I see you before you leave?
18. Will you be able to help me next week?
19. Will he be able to go to school?
20. Shall I begin now?
21. Shall we go to the movies?
22. Did he get married?
23. Did he marry her?
24. Do you know how to read?
25. Do you have any money left?
26. Do they have any left?
27. Do you have a lot of money left?
28. Did they steal a piece of candy?
29. Will he steal the books?
30. Are they going to steal everything?
31. Did she rob you?
32. Will they rob me?

LESSON 2.
VOCABULARY.
1. to hang, hung, hung, Colgar 14. cat gato
2. to play, played, Jugar 15. enemy enemigo
played
3. to escape, escaped, Escaper 16. meeting junta, mitin;
escaped encuentro.
4. to swim, swam, swum Nadar 17. plan plan

5. to dress, dressed, Vestir 18. bell campana; cascabel

dressed
6. to clap, clapped, Aplaudir 19. en el (al) centro
clapped downtown
7. during Durante 20. block cuadra, manzana
8. simple Sencillo 21. neck cuello;pescuezo
9. important Importante 22. hair pelo; vello
10. difficult Diffcil 23. face cara
11. safe Seguro; a 24. nose nariz
salvo
12. dangerous Peligroso 25. hand mano
danger Peligro
13. mouse Ratón 26. great gran
mice Ratones

IDIOMS.
1. to get away, got away, got away Escaparse
2. to look (with an adjective) verse, parecer (con adjetivo)
He looks sad. Él se ve triste.
She looks good in blue. Ella se ve bien de azul.
3. to look like (with a noun) parecer, parecerse a (con sustantivo)
He looks like a teacher. Parece un profesor.
He looks like his father. Él se parece a su papá.
4. It's possible. Es posible.
5. It's impossible. Es imposible.
6. finally, at last por fin
7. all of us todos nosotros
all of them todos ellos
all of you todos Uds.
8. what else? ¿qué más?
who else? ¿quién más?
9. just then en ese momento
10. There'll be cheese. Habrá queso.

EXERCISE 1 Translate. the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. It rains, doesn’t it?
2. It doesn't rain, does it?
3. It rained, didn't it?
4. It didn't rain, did it?
5. It’ll rain, won’t it?
6. It won’t, Will it?
7. It's raining, isn’t it?
8. It isn't raining, is it?
9. It was raining, wasn't it?
10. It wasn't raining, was it?
11. It was going to rain, wasn't it?
12. It wasn't going to rain, was it?
13. John will get married, won't he?
14. John won't get married, will he?
15. John will be able to get married, won't he?
16. John won't be able to get married, will he?
17. What's John getting married for?
18. What was John getting married for?
19. What did John get married for?
20. Let's get married
21. Marry her.
22. Don't marry her.

THE PAST PARTICIPLE OF REGULAR VERBS. EL PARTICIPIO DE LOS VERBOS

REGULARES
El participio de los verbos regulares es igual al tiempo pasado. Estudie lo siguiente.
Verb Past Tense Past Participle Translation
ask asked asked Preguntar
answer answered answered Responder
arrive (in, at) arrived (in, arrived (in, at) Llegar
at)
believe believed believed Creer
call called called Llamar
clean cleaned cleaned Limpiar
close closed closed Cerrar
clap clapped clapped Aplaudir
complete completed completed Completer
change changed changed Cambiar
correct corrected corrected Corregir
drop dropped dropped Tirar
dictate dictated dictated Dictar
dress dressed dressed Vestir
escape escaped escaped Escaper
fix fixed fixed Arreglar
finish finished finished Terminar
fill filled filled Llenar
form formed formed Formar
help helped helped Ayudar
hurry hurried hurried Apurar
invite invited invited Invitar
jump jumped jumped Saltar
kill killed killed Matar
live lived lived Vivir
like liked liked Gustar
learn learned learned Aprender
look (at) looked (at) looked (at) Mirar
look (for) looked (for) looked (for) Buscar
laugh (at) laughed (at) laughed (at) Reir de

THE PAST PARTICIPLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS EL PARTICIPIO DE LOS VERBOS

IRREGULARES
Verb Past Tense Past Participle Translation
be was, were been ser
bring brought brought Traer
buy bought bought Comprar
begin began begun Empezar
become becarne become Llegar a ser
break broke broken Romper
catch caught caught Atrapar
come came come Venir
come back came back come back Regresar
cut cut cut Cortar
do did done Hacer
drink drank drunk Beber
eat ate eaten Comer
feel felt felt Sentir
fly flew flown Volar
forget forgot forgotten Olvidar
find found found Encontrar
go went gone Ir
go back went back gone back Regresar
go to bed went to bed gone to bed Ir a la cama
go to sleep went to sleep gone to sleep Ir a dormir
give gave given Dar
give up gave up given up. Rendirse

Learn these words. SUPPLEMENTARYVOCABULARY

1. arrival llegada 11. full lleno; satisfecho
2. completion terminación 12. feeling sentirniento
3. complete completo 13. form forma, esqueleto
4. completely completamente 14. formation formación
5. change cambio 15. help ayuda
6. correction corrección 16. helper ayudante
7. correct correcto 17. helpful útil; comedido
8. correctly correctamente 18. invitation invitación
9. dictador dictador 19. knowledge conocimiento
10. Dictation. dictado 20. kiIIer asesino
21. life vida 42. saleslady vendedora
22. loss pérdida 43. singer cantante
23. loser (noun) perdedor 44. song canción
24. losing (ad) perdedor 45. swimmer nadador
25. love amor 46. swimming natación
26. lover amante; galán 47. talk plática
atento
27. lovely encantador, 48. talkative locuaz, parlachfn
hermoso
28. listener oyente 49. teacher maestro
29. necessity necesidad 50. thought pensamiento
30. necessary necesario 51. thoughtful considerado;
31. necessarily necesariamente 52. thoughtless desatento,
-desconsiderado
32. player jugador 53. translation traducción
33. playful juguetón 54. use uso
34. pronunciation pronunciación 55. useful útil
35. runner corredor 56. useless inútil
36. seat asiento 57. visitor visitante,visita
37. sitting sentando 58. visit visita
38. speaker orador 59. worker trabajador; obrero
39. speech discurso 60. writer escritor
40. sale venta; barata 61. winner (noun) ganador
41. salesman vendedor 62. winning (ad) ganador

EXERCISE 2. Translate the following questions. Answer them in the affirmative and
in the negative.
1. Will you visit your cousin after your arrival?
2. Are crows completely black?
3. Do you have change for five pesos?
4. Is that sentence correct?
5. Do you like to take Dictation.?
6. Is that glass full of water?
7. Can you give all the forms of the verb be?
8. Do you need any help?
9. Is he the teacher's helper?
10. Did you get an invitation? '
11. Do they have a good knowledge of English?
12. Is that man a killer?
13. Is your life interesting?
14. Is her husband thoughtful ?
15. Are their children thoughtless ?
16. Was Clark Gable a great lover in the movies?
17. Are you a good listener?
18. Is money a necessity?
19. Is he a good football player?
20. Is English pronunciation hard?
21. Is he a fast runner?
22. Did you have a good seat at the movies?
23. Is your teacher a good speaker?
24. Do you like to make speeches?
25. Is that store having a sale?
26. Do you like that song?
27. Is he a good swimmer?
28. Is he a good teacher?
29. Was my translation correct?
30. Is English useful?
31. Are women very talkative?
32. Did you have a visitor last night?
33. Is that man a good worker?
34. Is that man a writer?
35. Is that girl the winner?

EXERCISE 3. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. There'll be four children.
2. There won't be four children.
3. Will there be four children?
4. Won't there be four children?
5. how many children will there be?
6. There'll be a cake.
7. There won't be a cake.
8. Will there be a cake?
9. Won't there be a cake?
10. how many cakes will there be?
11. I’ll be hungry.
12. I won't be hungry.
13. You'll be sleepy.
14. You won't be sleepy.
15. She'll be afraid.
16. She won't be afraid.
17. It'll be cold.
18. It won't be cold.
19. It'll be hot.
20. It won't be hot.
21. I’ll have to work.
22. I won't have to work.
23. You'll have to speak.
24. you won't have to speak.
25. She’ll have to go.
26. She won't have to go.

EXERCISE 4. Translate the following sentences into Spanish, using forms of the
verb looks
verse, parecer. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and interrogative
negative.
1. She looks good in green.
2. The water looks very black.
3. Her husband looks very young.
4. The sick child looks weak.
5. Your brother looks nice in brown.
6. That cake looks good.
7. That woman looks sad.
8. Those children look happy.
9. That car looks new.
10. That man looks sick.

EXERCISE 5. Translate the following sentences into English, using forms of the
verb look (verse).
1. Tu casa se ve muy limpia.
2. Sus cortinas se ven muy blancas.
3. Él se vio muy enojado.
4. La escuela se ve muy grande, ¿verdad?
5. Ud. se verá cansada si no duerme esta noche.
6. Ella dijo que su vestido era azul, pero se ve verde.
7. Sus manos se ven rojas.
8. Su pelo se veía muy negro ayer.
9. ¿Se vio cansado el maestro?
10. ¿Por qué no se ve bien su hermana de verde?

EXERCISE 6. Translate the following sentences into Spanish, using forms of the
verb look like parecer, parecerse a. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative.
1. John looks like his father.
2. These boys look like Mexicans.
3. My little dog looks like a cat.
4. You look like your mother.
5. It looks like it's going to rain.
6. That dress looks like mine.
7. That house looks like a barn.
8. He looks like his cousin.
9. They look like people from the country.
10. We look like farmers.

EXERCISE 7. Translate the following sentences into English, using forms of the
verb look like (parecer, parecerse a).
1. Si eres doctor, ¿por qué no lo (one) pareces?
2. Él no parece profesor, ¿verdad?
3. Sé que ese hombre es americano, pero él parece mexicano.
4. Ellos parecían agricultores.
5. ¿Crees que ella se parece a mí?
6. Esa niñita se parecerá a su mamá dentro de diez años.
7. Ese libro se parece al mío.
8. Ayer parecía que (like) iba a llover, pero no llovió.
9. Este café parece agua sucia.
10. Tu abuelito no se parece a tu papá.
EXERCISE 8. Translate into Spanish.
1. The woman that looks like your aunt doesn't live on this street anymore.
2. If you don't have any money left, what are you going to do?
3. We're going to live in a city far from here.
4. We have a lot of things to do before six o'clock.
5. John is here, but Bill can't come until eight-fifteen.
6. Don't look out of the window because everybody Will see you.
7. He went out of town on Monday and came back on Tuesday.
8. I lived above him on the third floor for ten years.
9. We washed the wall below that window, but it's dirty again.
10. He robbed my house. He stole all my money.
11. Do you know how to swim?
12. Take that chair out of the bedroom and take that rug out of the living room.
13. I won't be able to hear from here.
14. Will you be able to put that table behind the sofa?
15. I didn't go out yesterday because I didn't feel well.

EXERCISE 9. Verb Practice

1. She hangs her hat in the closet every day.
2. She doesn't hang her hat in the closet every day.
3. Does she hang her hat in the closet every day?
4. Doesn't she hang her hat in the closet every day?
5. Why does she hang her hat in the closet every day?
6. She hung her dress in the closet yesterday.
7. She didn't hang her dress in the closet yesterday.
8. Did she hang her dress in the closet yesterday?
9. Didn't she hang her dress in the closet yesterday?
10. Why did she hang her dress in the closet yesterday?
11. She's hanging it in the kitchen.
12. She isn't hanging it in the kitchen.
13. Is she hanging it in the kitchen?
14. Isn't she hanging it in the kitchen?
15. What's she hanging it in the kitchen for?
16. She’ll hang them here tomorrow.
17. She won't hang them here tomorrow.
18. Will she hang them here tomorrow?
19. Won't she hang them here tomorrow?
20. How many will she hang here tomorrow?
21. She likes to hang her dress there.
22. She doesn't like to hang her dress there.
23. Does she like to hang her dress there?
24. Doesn't she like to hang her dress there?
25. Why doesn't she like to hang her dress there?
26. She had to hang his suit in the closet.
27. She didn't have to hang his suit in the closet.
28. Did she have to hang his suit in the closet?
29. Didn't she have to hang his suit in the closet?
30. Why did she have to hang his suit in the closet?
31. She'll be able to hang it over the bed.
32. She won't be able to hang it over the bed.
33. Will she be able to hang it over the bed?
34. Won't she be able to hang it over the bed?
35. Why won't she be able to hang it over the bed?

EXERCISE 10. Verb Practice

Repeat EXERCISE 9. using forms of the verbs dress, clap, swim, play, escape, get
away, look, look like in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 11. Read and translate. THE MICE AT A MEETING

The mice were afraid of their enemy, the cat; and for many years they lived near
him, knowing that their lives were in danger. "Let's have a meeting," said one of the
mice, "and try to form some plan that will help us get away from the cat. It's possible
that one of the mice has a good idea that will help us." During the meeting they
thought and talked about many plans. Finally, a young mouse got up and began to
speak. "I think," he said, feeling very important, "that it's a good idea to hang a bell
around the cat's neck. Then, when the cat comes, we'll hear the bell; and we'll all be
able to escape."
"I think that's a very good idea," said one mouse to another; and as these words
went around the room, all the mice began to clap for the young mouse that gave
them the idea for this good plan, just then an old mouse stood up and said, "My
friends, we're very happy to have a young mouse among us that can think of a plan
so good and so simple as putting a bell around the cat's neck so all of us will be
safe. Like all of you, I think it's a very good idea; but there's just one little thing that
I don't understand, who is going to put the bell around the cat's neck?"

EXERCISE 12. Write in English.

1. Habrá toda clase de vestidos y sombreros en (at) esta barata.
2. Atrapé a ese gato, pero se escapó.
3. Él se casó el 30 de junio de 1949.
4. ¿Qué más podrá Ud. contarme de México?
5. Era imposible ir al centro el 16 de septiembre.
6. Llovió todos los días durante el mes de julio.
7. Estoy seguro de que tendrás mucha hambre antes de las nueve.
8. Todos nosotros podremos visitar a Ud. en diciembre.
9. Aquel animal se ve muy peligroso.
10. Por fin encontramos un sombrero como el suyo de Ud.
11. ¿Te ayudamos? (sugiriendo). No, no me ayuden.
.
EXERCISE 13. Dictation.
1. All of them look like Americans.
2. Will you be able to catch that mouse that's in the kitchen?
3. My house is four blocks from the store.
4. We had to walk four blocks in the rain before we got to the store.
5. When I looked out of the window, it wasn't raining.
6. I was out of town for three days and l didn't know about your arrival?
7. Besides working all day, I have to work two hours at night.
8. I sat beside him yesterday at the meeting, but he didn't say anything to me.
9. You'll have to take the seat out of the car if you want to clean it.
10. There'll be twenty visitors in the city tomorrow.

EXERCISE 14.
Conversation Answer the following questions.
1. Where were you born?
2. When were you born?
3. Where are you from?
4. Where are your parents from?
5. Who did you come with?
6. Who did you go with?
7. What are you thinking about?
8. What was the movie about?
9. What are you talking about?
Answer the following questions in the negative.
10. Don't you play football anymore?
11. Don't you play basketball anymore?
12. Don't you live in Mexico anymore?
13. Don't they go to school any longer?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
14. Is the car full of people?
15. Will they eat downtown?
16. Will he come on Monday?
17. Shall I come tomorrow?
18. Shall we speak the new vocabulary?
19. Will she be able to finish by three o'clock?
20. Will the children be able to hear from here?
21. Will there be school on Tuesday?
22. Will there be enough bread for dinner?
23. Will you have to work on Sunday?
24. Will they have to leave in July?
25. Do you look like your mother?
26. Do you look good in red?
27. Are you as tall as your father?
28. Did you come as soon as possible?
29. Do we have any bread left?
30. Does Robert know how to swim?
LESSON 3.
VOCABULARY.
1. to get off, got bajarse (de) 14. lion león
off, got off
2. to shout (at), gritar 15. cave cueva
shout ed (at),
shout ed (at)
3. to cry, cried, llorar 16. paw pata (de animal)
cried
4. to pay, paid, pagar 19. tooth diente
paid
5. to take off; took quitarse teeth dientes
off, taken off
6. to rest, rested, descansar 20. newspaper periódico
rested
7. even though aunque. 21. paper papel; periódico
8. large grande 22. box caja
9. sharp agudo, filoso 23. party fiesta
10. kind amable, 24. corner rincón; esquina
bondadoso; clase
kindness amabilidad, bondad 25. bus camión
11.quick rápido 26. instead of en vez de
quickly rápidamente 27. cheap barato; corriente
12. different (from) diferente, 28. expensive caro; costoso
distinto (a, de)
13. crooked torcido, chueco

IDIOMS.
1. to make money ganar dinero
how much do you make a month? ¿Cuánto ganas al mes?
2. to be over acabarse, terminarse (de tiempo)
The movie is over. Ya se acabó la película.
The class is over Se acabó la clase
The war is over Se acabó la guerra
The movie was over at ten. La película se acabó a las diez.
3. a dollar an hour un dólar la hora
ten dollars a day diez dólares por día
three times a week tres veces por semana
twice a month dos veces al mes
once a year una vez al año
4. You're right. Tienes razón.
You were right. Tenías razón
5. What did you do on the weekend? ¿Qué hiciste el fin de semana?

EXERCISE 1, Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. Swim.
2. Don't swim.
3. Let him swim.
4. Don’t let him swim.
5. He played in the yard yesterday, didn't he?
6. He didn't play in the yard yesterday, did he?
7. He wants to play in the yard, doesn't he?
8. He doesn't want to play in the yard, does he?
9. He wanted to play in the yard, didn't he?
10. He didn't want to play in the yard, did he?
11. They swam, didn't they?
12. They didn't swim, did they?
13. They’ll be able to swim, won't they?
14. They won't be able to swim, Will they?
15. They’ll have to swim, won't they?
16. They won't have to swim, Will they?
17. There’ll be a party at my house tomorrow night.
18. There won't be a party at my house tomorrow night.
19. There’ll be a newspaper on your desk in the morning.
20. There won't be a newspaper on your desk in the morning.
21. There’ll be a lot of people here, won't there?
22. There won't be a lot of people here, Will there?

THE PRESENT PERFECT, EL ANTEPRESENTE

Se forma el antepresente (present perfect) en inglés igual que en castellano. Se
forma usando el presente del verbo have (haber) como auxiliar y el participio del
verbo empleado. La contracción negativa de have not es haven’t y de has not es
hasn’t. Se forma la contracción en afirmativo uniendo el pronombre y el auxiliar
have o has. Esta contracción no se emplea en la forma afirmativa más que
acompañada del participio.
Afirmativo sin contracción Afirmativo con Negativo
contracción
I have lived he vivido I've lived he vivido I haven't lived Yo no he
vivido
you have Tú has vivido you've lived Tú has you haven't Tú no has
lived vivido lived vivido
he has lived él ha vivido he's lived él ha vivido he hasn't él no ha
lived vivido
she has ella ha vivido she's lived ella ha she hasn't ella no ha
lived vivido lived vivido
it has lived ha vivido it's lived ha vivido it hasn't lived No ha vivido
we have hemos vivido we've lived hemos we haven't No hemos
lived vivido lived vivido
you have Uds. han you've lived Uds. han you haven't Ud s. n o h an
lived vivido vivido lived vivido
they have ellos han they've lived ellos han t he y ha ven 't e llo s n o h an
lived vivido vivido live d vivido

Interrogativo Interrogativo Negativo

have I lived? ¿he vivido? haven't I lived? ¿no he vivido?
have you lived? ¿has vivido? haven't you lived? ¿no has vivido?
has John lived? ¿ha vivido Juan? hasn't John lived? ¿no ha vivido
Juan?
has she lived? ¿ella ha vivido ? hasn't she lived? ¿ella no ha vivido ?
has it lived? ¿ha vivido ? hasn't it lived? ¿No ha vivido ?
have we lived? ¿hemos vivido? haven't we lived? ¿No hemos vivido ?
have you lived? ¿Uds. han vivido? haven't you lived? ¿Uds. no han
vivido?
have they lived? ¿ellos han vivido? haven't they lived? ¿ellos no han
vivido?

FOR, SINCE
Se emplea la palabra for (hace, desde hace) para especificar el plazo de tiempo y
since (desde, desde que) para indicar cuándo comenzó la acción. Compare el inglés
con el castellano.
How long have you been in Mexico? ¿hace cuánto has estado en México?
I've been here for a week. He estado aquí por una semana
I've been here since last Tuesday. He estado aquí desde el martes pasado.
I've lived here since I got married. He vivido aquí desde que me casé.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice

1. We've bought everything.
2. We haven't bought everything.
3. Have we bought everything?
4. Haven't we bought everything?
5. how many things have we bought?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 2, using forms of the verbs come back, shout (at), forget, come,
begin, eat, catch, drink, feel, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun
with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

Speak the past tense and past participle of these regular verbs.
Verb Past Tense Past Verb Past Tense Past
Participle Participle
cry cried cried speak studied studied
listen listened listened start started started
love loved loved stop stopped stopped
marry married married show showed showed
need needed needed snow snowed snowed
open opened opened talk talked talked
pass passed passed tum off turned off turned off
pick out picked out picked out tum on turned on turned on
pick up picked up picked up try tried tried
place placed placed translate translated translated
pronounce pronounced pronounced use used used
play played played visit visited visited
practice practiced practiced work worked worked
reply replied replied wash washed washed
reach reached reached wait (for) waited (for) waited (for)
rest rested rested walk walked walked
rain rained rained want wanted wanted
shout (at) shout ed shout ed
(at) (at)

Speak the past tense and past participle of these irregular verbs.
Verb Past Tense Past Verb Past Tense Past
Participle Participle
get got got get away got away got away
get angry got angry got angry get married got married got married
get mad got mad got mad get off got off got off
get rich got rich got rich leave left left
get sleepy got sleepy got sleepy lie down lay down lain down
get to got to got to lose lost lost
get here got here got here make made made
get there got there got there meet met met
get thirsty got thirsty got thirsty pay paid paid
get up got up got up put put put
hang hung hung put on put on put on
have had had read read read
hear heard heard run ran run
know knew known

LA POSICIÓN DE ALREADY (YA)

Generalmente la posición de already (ya) en las oraciones es igual a la de los
adverbios de frecuencia - antes de todos los verbos principales -, menos en las
formas del verbo be donde se colocan después. Ejemplos:
They've already Ellos ya han It's already late. Ya es tarde.
come. llegado.
Already no debe emplearse con el pretérito en inglés sino con el antepresente, pero
sí se empleará con el pasado del verbo be ( was, were). Ejemplo: He was already
here. Él ya estaba aquí.
EXERCISE 4.
Place already in the correct position in each sentence and Translate.
1. He's already here.
2. They can already speak English.
3. He has already eaten.
4. They're already working in the garden.
5. It's already six o'clock.
6. He was already there when we carne.
7. Helen was already making my birthday cake when I arrived.
8. Have already the children gone to bed?
9. I've already given him three hundred dollars.
10. Has already it rained today?
11. It was already time to go to bed when we got there.
12. We have already had our breakfast.
13. Has already John been here?
14. my mother has already read everything.
15. Do you have already four children?

EXERCISE 5. Answer the following questions in the affirmative, using already.

1. Is he here? Yes, he ’s already here.
2. Have they eaten? Yes, they Have already eaten.
3. Have the children got up? Yes, the children Have already got up
4. Do you have one hundred chickens? Yes, I already have one hundred chickens
5. Can you speak English? Yes, I Can already speak English
6. Have they eaten supper? Yes, they Have already eaten supper
7. Has she bought what she needs? Yes, she Has already bought what she needs
8. Is she living in her new house? Yes, she Is already living in her new house
9. Have they been here? Yes, they Have already been here
10. Have they opened the windows? Yes, they Have already opened the windows

THE PRESENT PERFECT OF CAN, EL ANTEPRESENTE DE CAN

Puesto que el auxiliar can existe solamente en el presente ( can) y en el pasado
(could), se forma el antepresente (present perfect) de can empleando el verbo be
able. Es decir, se tiene que emplear el presente del verbo have (have, has) y el
participio del verbo be able (been able). Hay que emplear el infinitivo con la
partícula to después de las formas del verbo be able. Ejemplo:
He has been able to go. Él ha podido ir.

EXERCISE 6.
Verb Practice
1. You've been able to understand everything.
2. you haven't been able to understand everything.
3. Have you been able to understand everything?
4. Haven't you been able to understand everything?
5. how much have you been able to understand?
EXERCISE 7. Verb Practice.
Repeat EXERCISE 6., using forms of the verbs pick out, break, get, pick up, read,
hear, lie down, lose, make, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with
each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 8. Change these sentences to the past tense, future tense, and present
perfect tense. Translate each time.
1. I can answer all the questions.
2. He can speak English.
3. That man can escape.
4. She can fill the glass with water.
5. We can help them.
6. Mrs. Clay can invite us.
7. Mary can make a dress.
8. Jack can translate those sentences.
9. We can make more money.
10. We can change these sentences to the negative.

EL USO DE LA PALABRA ONE O ONES DESPUÉS DE LOS ADJETIVOS

Se emplea la palabra one o ones (plural) con un adjetivo en vez de repetir un
sustantivo ya mencionado. Ejemplos:
This book is mine. The blue one is Este libro es mío. El azul es tuyo.
yours.
Do you want the big plates or the little ¿Quieres los platos grandes o los
ones? chicos?
Did you speak the first lesson or the ¿Estudiaste la primera lección o la
second one? segunda?

EXERCISE 9. Fill the blanks with one or ones, as required, and Translate.
1. I have a brown suit and a black.
2. I like to sing new songs, but not old.
3. There was no room on the first-class buses, so we had to take a second class.
4. This chair is old, but it's a good
5. Shall I wear my blue dress or my red?
6. The first five lessons are easy, but the sixth, is hard.
7. Here are five big chairs and two little.
8. What kind of girls do you like -short -or tall?
9. I don't want that, give me the other.
10. Do you want these? No, I want the other.

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. He made a lot of money last year.
2. I make $4.00 (dollars) a day.
3. They make a lot.
4. That teacher makes $300.00 (dollars) a month.
5. We've made a lot of money this year.
6. We’ll be able to make $100.00 (dollars) a week next year.
7. She’ll make $10.000 (dollars) a year.
8. I’ll have to make more money next year.
9. John is making a lot of money now.
10. He could make much more.

EXERCISE 11. Translate into Spanish.

1. Mr. Nash knows how to make money, doesn't he?
2. He doesn’t look like the man who came yesterday.
3. This street looks very crooked.
4. I’ll be able to make as much money as my brother next year.
5. how long has she studied English? She's studied English since last year.
6. Has it already owed this year?
7. He won’t have to go out of town on Monday, Will he?
8. After you hang the new curtains, I won't be able to look out of the window.
9. It's rained every day this week, so we haven't been able to do anything.
10. Helen won't be able to go out this afternoon because she doesn't feel well.
11. Those flowers look beautiful between those two tall trees.
12. Joe called that man and asked him the way to Cuernavaca.
13. It's dangerous to walk through the woods.
14. If you ever live among American people, you'll soon learn how to speak English.
15. The horses and cows are behind the barn.

EXERCISE 12. Verb Practice

1. The teacher gets off the bus.
2. The teacher doesn't get off the bus.
3. Does the teacher get off the bus?
4. Doesn't the teacher get off the bus?
5. Where does the teacher get off the bus?
6. The teacher got off the bus.
7. The teacher didn't get off the bus.
8. Did the teacher get off the bus?
9. Didn't the teacher get off the bus?
10. Where did the teacher get off the bus?
11. The teacher was going to get off the bus.
12. The teacher wasn't going to get off the bus.
13. Was the teacher going to get off the bus?
14. Wasn't the teacher going to get off the bus?
15. Where was the teacher going to get off the bus?
16. The teacher will get off the bus.
17. The teacher won't get off the bus.
18. Will the teacher get off the bus?
19. Won't the teacher get off the bus?
20. Where will the teacher get off the bus?
21. The teacher will be able to get off the bus.
22. The teacher won't be able to get off the bus.
23. Will the teacher be able to get off the bus?
24. Won't the teacher be able to get off the bus?
25. Where will the teacher be able to get off the bus?
26. The teacher has got off the bus.
27. The teacher hasn't got off the bus.
28. Has the teacher got off the bus?
29. Hasn't the teacher got off the bus?
30. Where has the teacher got off the bus?
31. The teacher has been able to get off the bus.
32. The teacher hasn't been able to get off the bus.
33. Has the teacher been able to get off the bus?
34. Hasn't the teacher been able to get off the bus?
35. Where has the teacher been ab le to get off the bus?

EXERCISE 13. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 12, using forms of the verbs pay, shout (at), cry, take off, make
money, be over, rest, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 14. Read and translate.

THE LION AND THE MOUSE
One day a lion was asleep in a cave in the woods when a mouse ran across his
face. The lion woke up and caught the mouse between his paws. "Please don't kill
me," said the mouse. "Let me live, and some day I'll do you a favor." The lion didn't
believe that a little animal like a mouse could ever help him, but the mouse looked
so small and so weak that the lion said to him, "Even though I'm a very large and
important animal, I'm very kind. I won't kill you. I'm going to let you go." Then the
lion put the mouse down on the ground, and the mouse ran away. Many weeks after
that, the mouse saw some men putting nets in different places in the woods to catch
lions. The next morning the mouse thought he heard someone calling for help. When
he stopped his work to listen, he knew that it was the lion's voice. I'll go to him at
once," thought the mouse. "Now I can do him a favor." The mouse ran through the
woods looking for the lion. Finally, he found him caught in one of the men's nets.
"Help me" shouted the lion. "These men have caught me, and they'll kill me if you
don't do something quick." "I've come to help you," said the mouse. "But what can
an animal as small as you are do?" asked the lion. " just wait a minute and you'll
see," answered the mouse. "I'll be able to help you." Then the mouse began to cut
the net with his sharp teeth. Soon there was a hole big enough for the lion to walk
through. When the lion was out of the net, the mouse said to him, "Now I've paid you
for the favor you did for me."

EXERCISE 15. Write in English.

1. ¿Se terminará la película a las diez?
2. Tenías razón acerca del periódico. Es difícil de leer.
3. ¿Has podido ganar veinte dólares al día todo el año?
4. No podremos salir de la ciudad este fin de semana.
5. Ellos se fueron a casa cuando se acabó la fiesta.
6. El dio que tenía razón, pero no lo creí.
7. Los amigos de Juan no podrán venir a las diez.
8. ¿Cuánto tiempo hace que estudias inglés? Hace un año que estudio inglés.
9. Habrá una fiesta en la casa de Alicia el primero de Julio.
10. ¿Ya comiste? Si, ya comí.

EXERCISE 16. Dictation.

1. I got so sleepy before the party was over that I went to bed.
2. Have you already been to Califomia?
3. I’ll have to work on Saturday, but I won't have to work on Sunday.
4. Take off your black hat and put on this one.
5. We haven't been able to see Mr. Miller for three days.
6. A lot of people left before the movie was over.
7. We'll see if you're right.
8. There won't be any school next week.
9. The children will get cold if it begins to rain.
10. I'll meet you in front of the park at nine -thirty.

EXERCISE 17. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. When were you born?
2. Where were you born?
3. Where do you get off the bus?
Answer the following questions, using for and since.
4. how long have you lived in Mexico?
5. how long has he lived in the United States?
6. how long have you studied English?
7. how long has Henry studied English?
8. how long have you worked at Ford?
9. how long have you been here?
Answer the following questions in the negative.
10. Don't you live there any more?
11. Don't you go out of town on week ends any more?
12. Doesn't he speak English any longer?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative.
13. Has it already rained today?
14. Has he already come?
15. Have you already visited the United States?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
16. Do you know how to read?
17. Is the movie over?
18. Was the movie over early?
19. Do you make a lot of money?
20. Is this knife as sharp as that one?
21. Is this box as big as that one?
22. Is it raining?
23. Shall I open the window?
24. Shall I read?
25. Shall I translate?

LESSON 4.
VOCABULARY.
1. to fall (down), fell caer(se) 14. neighbor vecino
(down), fallen (down)
2. to shake, shook, sacudir; moverse; 15. head cabeza
shaken temblar; agitar
3. to spill, spilled, derramar, tirar 16. favorite favorito,
spilled (líquido) predilecto
4. to carry, carried, cargar, llevar 17. ribbon listón
carried
5. to disappear, desaparecer 18. dream sueño
disappeared,
disappeared
6. to dance, danced, bailar 19. happiness felicidad
danced
7. even a mano; hasta 20. road camino
even if Aunque, aun cuando 21. highway Carretera
not even ni siquiera 22. spring primavera
8. against contra 23. summer verano
9. along a lo largo 24. fall otoño
10. empty vacío 25. winter invierno
11. careful cuidadoso 26. far lejos
carefully con cuidado 27. increasing escala
scale ascendente
12. market mercado 28. degree grado
13. bucket cubeta

IDIOMS.
1. to have a good time divertirse, pasarlo bien
to have fun divertirse, pasarlo bien
2. Have a nice week end. Que tengas un agradable fin de semana.
Have a nice vacation. Que tengas agradables vacaciones.
3. to get sick enfermarse
4. Be careful. Tenga cuidado.
5. like this, this way así de esta manera
like that, that way así de esa manera
6. good luck buena suerte
bad luck mala suerte
7. You're lucky. tienes suerte.
8. You're unlucky. eres sin suerte
9. the one that el que, la que
the ones that los que, las que
The one that doesn't speak won't pass. El que no estudie no pasará.
10. He didn't even ten me. Ni siquiera me dijo.
11. Have you ever been to Taxco? ¿alguna vez has estado en Taxco?
Yes, I've been there. Si, he estado ahí.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. Shout.
2. Don't shout at me.
3. Let them shout.
4. Don't let them shout at you.
5. They've been able to rest, haven't they?
6. They haven't been able to rest, have they?
7. Have they been able to rest?
8. Haven't they been able to rest?
9. They'll rest, won't they?
10. They won't rest, will they?
11. They'll be able to pay you, won't they?
12. They won't be able to pay you, will they?
13. They've been able to pay you, haven't they?
14. They haven't been able to pay you, have they?
15. Have they been able to pay you?
16. Haven't they been able to pay you?
17. What are they getting off here for?
18. What did they get off here for?
19. There'll be a party tonight.
20. There won't be a party tonight.

COMPARACIÓN DE ADJETIVOS y ADVERBIOS MONOSÍLABOS El GRADO

COMPARATIVO DE SUPERIORI DAD
Se usa el grado comparativo cuando se comparan dos personas u objetos o dos
grupos de personas u objetos. Los adjetivos y los adverbios de una sola silaba (y
los de dos sílabas que terminan en y, y en w) forman el grado comparativo de
superioridad agregando er. La partícula er en este caso equivale a más en
castellano. Si la palabra termina en e, solamente se agrega r. Generalmente se usa
la palabra than después del comparativo cuando se exprese la palabra que en
castellano. Ejemplos.
Adjective or Comparative Adverb Increasing Scale
Degree
blue bluer than más azul que
young younger than más joven que
big bigger than más grande que
easy easier than más facil que

El GRADO SUPERLATIVO DE SUPERIORIDAD

Se usa el grado superlativo cuando se comparan una o más personas u objetos con
otros o uno o más grupos de personas u objetos con otros. Los adjetivos y los
adverbios de una sola sílaba (y los de dos sílabas que terminan en y, y en w forman
el grado superativo de superioridad agregando est. La partícula est en este caso
equivale a más en castellano. SI la palabra termina en e, solamente se agrega st.
Generalmente el superlativo se usa precedido de la palabra the. Cuando se expresa
la palabra de en castellano, el superlativo va seguido de la palabra of o in, según el
caso.
1 Adjective or Comparative Degree Superlative Degree
Adverb Increasing Increasing
Scale Scale
blue bluer than más azul que the bluest el más azul
young younger than más joven que the youngest el más joven
big bigger than más grande que the biggest el más grande
easy easier than más fácil que the easiest el más fácil
angry angrier than más enojado que the angriest el más enoado
big bigger than más grande que the biggest el más grande
blue bluer than más azul que the bluest el más azul
busy busier than más ocupado que the busiest el más ocupado
black blacker than más negro que the blackest el más negro
clean cleaner than más limpio que the cleanest el más limpio
cold colder than más frío que the coldest el más frío
dirty dirtier than más sucio que the dirtiest el más sucio
early earlier than más temprano the earliest el que más
que temprano
easy easier than más fácil que the easiest el más fácil
fast faster than más rápido que the fastest el más rápido
fine finer than más fino que the finest el más fino
full fuller than más lleno que the fullest el más lleno
green greener than más verde que the greenest el más verde
happy happier than más feliz que the happiest el más feliz
hard harder than más duro que the hardest el más duro
hot hotter than más caliente que the hottest el más caliente
kind kinder than más amable que the kindest el más amable
large larger than más grande que the largest el más grande
late later than más tarde que the latest el que más tarde
little littler than más pequeño que the littlest el más pequeño
long longer than más largo que the longest el más largo
mad madder than más enojado que the maddest el más enojado
narrow narrower than más estrecho que the narrowest el más estrecho
near nearer than más cerca que the nearest el que más cerca
nice nicer than más bonito que the nicest el más bonito
simple simpler than más sencillo que the simplest el más sencillo

Compatativos irregulares
good better than mejor que the best el mejor
well better than mejor que the best el mejor
bad worse than peor que the worst el peor
far farther than más lejos que the farthest el que más lejos
a lot much, more más que the most el que más
than
many much, more más que the most el que más
than
little less than menos que the least el que menos
few less than menos que the least el que menos

Speak the following sentences.

1. The living room is clean.
The dining room is cleaner than the living room. (comparative degree)
The kitchen is the cleanest room in the house. (superlative degree)
2. John is happy.
John is happier than Robert. (comparative degree)
John is the happiest boy in school. (superlative degree)
3. Mexico City is warm.
Cuernavaca is warmer than Mexico City. (comparative degree)
Acapulco is the warmest of the three. (superlative degree)
4. John was late. Juan llegó tarde
Robert was later than John . Roberto llegó más tarde que Juan (comparative
degree)
Mary was the latest of all. (María fue la que más tarde llegó de todos (superlative
degree)

EXERCISE 2
Fill the blanks with the comparative degree of the adjective or adverb indicated
(increasing scale) and translate.
(young) 1. Mary is than her sister, isn't she?
(cold) 2. Is the United States than Mexico?
(easy) 3. The first book isn't than the second one.
(fast) 4. Did the rabbit is than the turtle?
(hard) 5. The first lesson was than the second one.
(large) 6. The table in the dining room is than the one in the kitchen.
(long) 7. The movies we saw today were than the ones we saw yesterday.
(late) 8. I arrived than you, didn't I?
(happy) 9. These children are than those.
(full).10. Is your glass than mine?

EXERCISE 3.
Fill the blanks with the superlative degree of the adjective or adverb indicated
(increasing scale) and Translate.
(big) 1. What city in Mexico is the?
(hot) 2. Is Acapulco the place in Mexico?
(good) 3. The fifth lesson is the one in the book.
(dirty) 4. you have the hands of all the children.
(nice) 5. I think this dress is the of all of them.
(little) 6. Paul is the child in the family.
(long) 7. The Pan American Highway is the highway in Mexico.
(early) 8. Who arrived the?
(far) 9. John lives the from school.
(well) 10. This store pays the.

EXERCISE 4.
Fill the blanks with the comparative or the superlative degree, O$ required, of the
adjective or adverb indicated (increasing scale) and translate.
(warm) 1. Summer is than winter.
(narrow) 2. I live on the street in the city.
(hard) 3. This chair is than the sofa.
(fast) 4. Can a lion run than a horse?
(cold) 5. The bedroom is the room in the house.
(full) 6. This box is the of all.
(kind) 7. My grandmother is the woman I know.
(bad) 8. I had to sleep in the room in the hotel.
(green) 9. The grass looks than the trees, doesn't it?
(good) 10. This book is than that one.

EXERCISE 5.
Place already in the correct position in each sentence and translate.
1. Has he gone?
2. Have they eaten?
3. Have you gone to bed?
4. She's put on her dress.
5. Mr. Clay has opened the store.
6. We've read that book.
7. Has Miss Clay picked out her new hat?
8. The boys have picked up the papers on the floor.
9. Has it snowed in Chicago?
10. Have the girls turned off the radio?

EXERCISE 6.
Answer the following questions in the affirmative, using already.
1. Has he already come?
2. Have you already translated these sentences?
3. Have they already arrived?
4. Has she already finished her work?
5. Have we already learned the lesson?
6. Have the girls already met my cousin?
7. Has Mary already put on her new dress?
8. Have Robert and Paul already had their English lesson?
9. Has Mrs. Clay already drunk that water?
10. Have the boys already come back?

Speak the past tense and past participle of these irregular verbs.
Verb Past Past Verb Past Past
Tense Participle Tense Participle
Be able Could Been able Steal Stole Stolen
Fall Fell Fallen Take Took taken
Say Said Said Take off Took off Taken off
See Saw Seen Teach Taught Taught
Shake Shook Shaken Think Thought Thought
Sit Sat Sat Understand Understood Understood
Speak Spoke Spoken Write Wrote Written
Sleep Slept Slept Wake up Woke up Woke up
Sell Sold Sold Wear Wore Worn
Stand up Stood up Stood up Win Won Won
Swim Swan Swum
La posición de still (todavía) y yet (ya)
La palabra still (todavía) se coloca generalmente en la posición igual a la palabra
already (ya) -antes del verbo principal y después de las formas del verbo be.
La palabra yet (ya) se coloca generalmente al final de la oración , y se puede
emplear en el interrogativo. En el afirmativo no se emplea la palabra yet, sino
already.
Ya already
Have you already eaten? Yes, I've already eaten.
¿Ya has comido? Si, ya he comido.
Have you eaten yet? Yes, I've already eaten.
¿Ya has comido? Si, ya he comido.

Todavía... no not... yet

No, I haven't eaten yet. No, todavía no he comido.

Todavía still
Are you still eating? Yes, I'm still eating.
¿Todavía estás comiendo? Si, todavía estoy comiendo.

Ya...no not...anymore
No, I'm not eating any more. No, ya no estoy comiendo.

EXERCISE 7.
Fill the blanks with still or yet, as required, and translate.
1. Do you have to go to the doctor every week?
2. Hasn't my new suit come? No, not.
3. Is your son playing football?
4. Yes, he's playing football.
5. Do you love me?
6. Have they eaten breakfast? No, not.
7. They haven’t gone to work, and it's already ten-thirty.
8. I have all my knives and forks.
9. Do you like coffee and cake?

EXERCISE 8.
Fill the blanks with one or ones, as required, and translate.
1. I studied all the lessons except the last.
2. Don't take this bus. Take the next.
3. He ate all the apples, even the bad,
4. The first-class buses go faster than the second class.
5. I'll give you a book. Which.do you want?
6. Shall I buy this suit or the other?
7. There are all kinds of newspapers in the United States -good - and bad.
8. I want a piece of candy, but not a large.
9: It's a small car, but it's a good.
10. These cups are bigger than the other.
EXERCISE 9.
Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.
1. There've been many parties.
2, There haven't been many parties.
3. Have there been many parties?
4. Haven't there been many parties?
5. There's been a lot of rain this month.
6. There hasn’t been much rain this month.
7. Has there been a lot of rain this month?
8. Hasn't there been a lot of rain this month?
9. I've been sleepy.
10. I haven’t been sleepy.
11. He's been thirsty.
12. He hasn’t been thirsty.
13. We've been afraid.
14. We haven't been afraid.
15. You've been hungry.
16. I haven't had to work this week.
17. They've had to speak every day.
18. They haven’t had to speak every day.
19. Have they had to speak every day?
20. Haven't they had to speak every day?

EXERCISE 10
Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative. Repeat the exercise, using forms of the verb have fun
instead of have a good time.
1. I'm going to have a good time this weekend.
2. He had a good time on his vacation.
3. We'll have a good time next summer.
4. You'll be able to have a good time in Cuernavaca.
5. We can have a good time tomorrow night.
6. She has a good time every spring.
7. They're having a good time with their friends.
8. The children have had a good time today.
9. I'm having a good time with my family.
10. John had a good time at Mary's party.

EXERCISE 11
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did you have a good time on the 16th of September?
2. Did you have fun at the party yesterday?
3. Do you have a good time when you go to the United States?
4. Do you have fun when you don't have to work?
5. Will you have a good time at school tomorrow?
6. Will you have fun when you visit your grandmother?
7. Can you have a good time in Acapulco if it rains?
8. Can you have fun if your friends aren't here?
9. Have you had a good time all week?
10. Have you had fun with the neighbor's children?

EXERCISE 12
Translate into Spanish.
1. Will you teach me how to dance?
2. I didn't make any money last week.
3. He knows that I'm right.
4. We'll be able to come as soon as we finish, won't we?
5. There's been a lot of rain this summer, hasn't there?
6. Do you think there'll be a lot of snow this winter?
7. I've already seen that movie.
8. Haven't you read that book yet? No, not yet.
9. They still believe that she can learn how to walk.
10. I still think you'll have a better time in Acapulco than in Veracruz.
11. Did you have a good time while you were in New York?
.12. Spring is the best time of the year, and winter is the worst.
13. She doesn't look good in green, and I don't know why she wears it.
14. That man says he's a writer, but he doesn't look like one.
15. I'm sorry that you have had to work every day and that there's been so much
work.

EXERCISE 13.
Verb Practice
1. It always falls, doesn’t it?
2. It never falls, does it?
3. Does it always fall?
4. Doesn't it always fall?
5. Why doesn't it ever fall?
6. It fell down, didn't it?
7. It didn't fall down, did it?
8. Did it fall down?
9. Didn't it fall down?
10. Why didn't it fall down?
11. It was falling down, wasn't it?
12. It wasn't falling down, was it?
13. Was it falling down?
14. Wasn't it falling down?
15. Why wasn’t it falling down?
16. It could fall down, couldn't it?
17. It couldn't fall down, could it?
18. Could it fall down?
19. Couldn't it fall down?
20. Why couldn't it fall down?
21. It's fallen down, hasn't it?
22. It hasn't fallen down, has it?
23. Has it fallen down?
24. Hasn't it fallen down?
25. Why hasn't it fallen down?
26. It’ll be able to fall down, won't it?
27. It won't be able to fall down, Will it?
28. Will it be able to fall down?
29. Won't it be able to fall down?
30. Why won't it be able to fall down?
31. It's been able to fall down, hasn't it?
32. It hasn't been able to fall down, has it?
33. Has it been able to fall down?
34. Hasn't it been able to fall down?
35. Why hasn't it been able to fall down?

EXERCISE 14.
Verb Practice Repeat EXERCISE 13., using forms of the verbs disappear , dance,
shake, spill, carry, get sick, have a good time, have fun, in short sentences. Use a
different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is
possible.

EXERCISE 15.
Read and translate.
THE GIRL AND THE MILK
The girl was singing as she walked along the road one summer morning. On the top
of her head she carried a bucket of milk that she was taking to the market to sell.
When she stopped to rest for a few minutes under a tree, she began to think of all
the things she was going to do with the money she received for the milk. "I'll buy
some chickens from a neighbor", she said, "and when they lay eggs, I'll be able to
sell the eggs to the doctor's wife. With the money I receive for the eggs I can buy a
new dress and a new ribbon for my hair. I want a green dress and a green ribbon
because I look good in green, and I’ll dress very carefully in my beautiful new dress
and wear it to a dance. And the boys Will ask me to dance, but I won't even look at
them. Then, when they ask me again, I'll shake my head -like this. As the girl spoke,
she shook her head. The bucket fell off (se cayó) her head, and the milk spilled on
the ground. So, all of her dreams of happiness disappeared, and she had nothing
left but the empty bucket and she thought of listening to an angry mother when she
got home.

EXERCISE 16
Write in English.
1. Estoy seguro que no nos divertiremos en la fiesta si llevarnos a los niños con
nosotros.
2. Adiós. Le veo el lunes. Que tenga un buen fin de semana.
3. Hágalo así. No lo haga de esa manera.
4. Este es el mejor libro que puedes encontrar, pero no creo que sea (it's) mejor
que el que tienes.
5. Es Ud. muy afortunado de poder bailar con una chica tan bonita como María,
¿verdad?
6. Él tiene muy mala salud. Se enfermó la primavera pasada y todavía está en
cama.
7. Ayer me sentí muy mal, pero hoy me siento peor. -
8. ¿Cuánto tiempo hace que Ud. trabaja aquí? Hace seis meses que trabajo aquí.
9. ¿Van a jugar este año los Yankees contra los Giants?
10. ¿Todavía no se han levantado los niños? No, todavía no.

EXERCISE 17.
Dictation.
1. We're going to have a good time when we get married even if we don't have any
money.
2. Those flowers you bought today are much bigger and redder than those I bought
yesterday.
3. Be careful with those glasses. I paid a lot of money for them.
4. I got so sick while I was downtown that I had to go home at once.
5. There won't be enough time to finish all this work.
6. There've been plenty of potatoes in the market all fall.
7. I don’t think we'll be able to visit you until winter:
8. Have you ever been to the United States?
9. Be careful or you'll spill the milk on the floor.
10. There'll be a dance on Thursday night, but there won't be one on Friday night.

EXERCISE 18
Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Do you still live on Madison Street?
2. Do you still work in Chicago?
3. Are you still speaking English?
4. Is he still in Mexico?
5. Have you bought a new car yet?
6. Haven’t you finished yet?
7. Hasn't she got married yet?
8. Hasn't he learned how to speak Spanish yet?
9. Is English easier than Spanish?
10. Is Acapulco hotter than Veracruz?
11. Is the United States colder than Mexico?
12. Is John the biggest boy in school?
13. Is winter the coldest time of the year?
14. Did you have a good time at the party?
15. Will you have a good time this weekend?
16. Did you have fun in Taxco?
17. Will you have fun during your vacation?
18. Have you ever been in New York?
19. Have you always lived in Chicago?
20. Have you studied your lesson?
21. Have you danced with Mary?
22. Have you been able to sleep?
23. Have you been able to practice your English?
24. Will you be able to work tomorrow?
25. Will you be able to go to the movies tonight?
Answer the following questions.
26. how long have you lived in Cueravaca?
27. how long have they lived m Mexico?
28. how long have you worked here?
29. how long has he studied English?
30. how long has he been there?

LESSON 5.
VOCABULARY.
1. to blow, blew, Soplar 13. moon Luna
blown
2. To die, died, Morir, secar 14. star Estrella
died
3. to tum over, Voltear 15. sky Cielo, firmamento
turned over, turned Remover
over
4. to shine, shone, Brillar 16. sea Mar
shone
5. to dig, dug, dug Excavar 17. river Río
6. to lend, lent, Prestar 18. mountain Montaña
lent
7. soft Suave, blando 19. wind Viento
Softly Suavemente 20. world Mundo
8. orchard Huerto 21. class Clase
9. fruit Fruta 22. north Norte
10. treasure Tesoro 23. south Sur
11. land Tierra, terreno 24. east Este
Soil Tierra (para 25. west oeste
sembrar)
12. sun Sol

IDIOMS.
1. to make a living ganarse la vida, sostenerse
2. to get old Envejecer
3. I can't help it. No puedo evitarlo .
I couldn’t help it. No pude evitarlo .
4. Let me know. Avíseme.
5. It's cheap. Es barato.
6. It's expensive. Es caro.
7. I think so. Creo que sí.
I don't think so. Creo que no.
8. so (that) Entonces, para que.
Give me money so (that) I can buy it. Dame dinero para que lo compre.
9. It's windy. Hace viento, Hace aire.
It's cloudy. Está nublado.
It's sunny. Hace sol, Hay sol.
10. The sun is shining. El sol está brillando.
11. This is the best book I've ever read. Este es el mejor libro que he leído.

EXERCISE 1.
Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.
1. Will they be able to dance this evening?
2. Won't they be able to dance this evening?
3. Have they been able to dance this evening?
4. Haven't they been able to dance this evening?
5. There'll be a dance tonight, won't there?
6. There won't be a dance tonight, will there?
7. Will there be a dance tonight?
8. Won't there be a dance tonight?
9. Will they be hungry after the movie?
10. Won't they be hungry after the movie?
11. There've been a lot of dances this year, haven't there?
12. There haven't been a lot of dances this year, have there?
13. Have there been a lot of dances this year?
14. Haven't there been a lot of dances this year?
15. Have they been sleepy?
16. Haven't they been sleepy?
17. Will they have to dance?
18. Won't they have to dance?
19. Have they had to dance?
20. Haven't they had to dance?

THEPASTPERFECT EL ANTECOPRETÉRITO
Se forma el antecopréterito (past perfect) en inglés igual que en castellano. Usando
el pasado del verbo have (had, había) como auxiliar y el participio del verbo
empleado. La contracción negativa de had not es hadn't. Se forma la contracción en
afirmativo con la partícula d agregada al pronombre. Esta contracción no se emplea
más que en la forma afirmativa, acompañada del participio. Ejemplos.
AfIrmativo sin contracción Afirmativo con contracción
I had worked yo había trabajado I’d worked yo había trabajado
you had worked Tú habías You’d worked Tú habías
trabajado trabajado
he had worked él había trabajado he’d worked él había trabajado
she had worked ella había She’d worked ella había
trabajado trabajado
it had worked había trabajado It’d worked había trabajado
we had worked habíamos We’d worked habíamos
trabajado trabajado
you had worked Uds. habían You’d worked Uds. habían
trabajado trabajado
they had worked ellos habian They’d worked ellos habian
trabajado trabajado
Negativo sin contracción Negativo con contracción
I ha d n ot wo rked yo no ha bí a t ra ba ja do I h ad n ’t wo rke d yo no ha bí a t ra ba ja do
you h ad no t wo rke d Tú no ha bí a s Yo u h ad n ’t wo rke d Tú no ha bí a s
t ra ba ja do t ra ba ja do
h e h ad no t wo rke d é l no ha bí a t ra ba ja do he ha dn ’t wo rked é l no ha bí a t ra ba ja do
she h ad no t wo rke d e lla no ha bí a Sh e h ad n ’t wo rke d e lla no ha bí a
t ra ba ja do t ra ba ja do
it h ad no t wo rke d No ha bí a t ra b a ja d o It h ad n ’t wo rked No ha bí a t ra b a ja d o
we ha d n ot wo rked No h ab ía mo s We ha dn ’t wo rke d No ha bí a mo s
t ra ba ja do t ra ba ja do
you h ad no t wo rke d Ud s. no ha bí an Yo u h ad n ’t wo rke d Ud s. no ha bí an
t ra ba ja do t ra ba ja do
t he y ha d n ot wo rked e llo s no ha b ia n Th e y ha dn ’t wo rked e llo s no ha b ia n
t ra ba ja do t ra ba ja do

Interrogativo Interrogativo Negativo

Auxiliar, sustantivo o pronombre, verbo.
h ad I wo rke d? ¿h ab ía yo t ra ba ja do ? ha dn ’t I wo rke d? ¿n o ha bí a yo
t ra ba ja do ?
h ad yo u wo rke d ? ¿h ab ía s Tú t ra ba ja do ? ha dn ’t Yo u wo rke d? ¿n o h ab ía s Tú
t ra ba ja do ?
h ad he wo rke d ? ¿h ab ía é l t ra b a ja d o? ha dn ’t he wo rked ? ¿n o ha bí a él
t ra ba ja do ?
h ad sh e wo rke d ? ¿h ab ía e lla t ra ba ja do ? ha dn ’t Sh e wo rke d? ¿n o ha bí a e lla
t ra ba ja do ?
h ad it wo rke d? ¿h ab ía t rab a jad o ? ha dn ’t It wo rked ? ¿n o h ab ía t rab a jad o ?
h ad we wo rke d? ¿h ab ía mo s t rab a jad o ? ha dn ’t We wo rke d ? ¿n o ha bí a mo s
t ra ba ja do ?
h ad yo u wo rke d ? ¿h ab ía n Ud s. ha dn ’t Yo u wo rke d? ¿n o ha bí an Ud s.
t ra ba ja do ? t ra ba ja do ?
h ad th e y wo rke d? ¿h ab ia n e llo s ha dn ’t The y wo rked ? ¿n o ha b ia n e llo s
t ra ba ja do ? t ra ba ja do ?
EXERCISE 2.
Verb Practice
1. They'd forgotten to tell him.
2. They hadn't forgotten to tell him.
3. Had they forgotten to tell him?
4. Hadn't they forgotten to tell him?
5. Why had they forgotten to tell him?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice-

Repeat exercise 2 using forms of the verbs feel, go, invite, get off, fix, live, learn,
finish, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the
interrogative words when it is possible.
Speak the comparative and superlative degree of the following adjectives and
adverbs (increasing scale).
Adjectives and adverbs Comparative Superlative
Cheap Cheaper than the cheapest
hungry hungrier than the hungriest
old older than the oldest
poor poorer than the poorest
pure purer than the purest
quick quicker than the quickest
red redder than the reddest
rich richer than the richest
Sail sailer than the sailest
sick sicker than the sickest
sad sadder than the saddest
sIow sIower than the sIowest
soft softer than the softest
soon sooner than the soonest
strong stronger than the strongest
short shorter than the shortest
safe safer than the safest
sIeepy sIeepier than the sIeepiest
thirsty thirstier than the thirstiest
tired tireder than the tiredest
tall taller than the tallest
tick. thicker than. the thickest
thin thinner than the thinnest
white whiter than the whitest
warm warmer than the warmest
weak weaker than the weakest
wide wider than the widest
young younger than the youngest

EXERCSE 4.
Fill the banks with the comparative degree of the adjective or adverb indicated
(increasing scale).
(blue) 1. These looks bluer than the sky.
(pretty) 2. Your dress is prettier than mine.
(soft) 3. My bed is softer than the sofa.
(short) 4. Robert is much shorter than John.
(wide) 5. The river is wider than the highway.
(white) 6. Snow is whiter than milk.
(sleepy) 7. I'm sleepier than he.
(slow) 8. A turtle is slower than a rabbit.
(bad) 9. Her EngIish is worst than mine.
(warm) 10. Acapulco is warmer than Mexico City.

EXERCISE 5.
Fill the blanks with the superlative degree of the adjective or adverb indicated
(increasing scale).
(young) 1. Paul is the youngest boy in my class.
(pretty) 2. Mary is the prettiest girl in school.
(rich) 3. Who is the richest man in the world?
(safe) 4. Which road is the safest?
(white) 5. You'll find the whitest snow in the mountains.
(tall) 6. I’ll need the tallest boy in the class.
(slow) 7. What animal is the slowest?
(thick) 8. This book is the thickest of all of them.
(warm) 9. Is Acapulco the warmest place in the world?
(good) 10. Who is the best student in the class?

EXERCISE 6.
Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as required, of the
adjective or adverb indicated (increasing scale).
(hungry) 1. His horse is hungrier than yours.
(late) 2. Who came the latest?
(early) 3. Did John get up earlier than you?
(busy) 4. My father is the busiest man in the office.
(long) 5. What is the longest river in the world?
(hot) 6. This soup is hotter than the coffee.
(small) 7. My dogs are smaller than that one.
(good) 8. This cake is better than that one.
(good) 9. This cake is the best of all the cakes.
(bad) -10. This cake is the worst of all.

THE PAST PERFECT OF CAN EL ANTECOPRETÉRITO DE CAN

Puesto que el auxiliar can existe solamente en el presente (can) y en el pasado
(could), se forma el antecopretérito (past perfect) de can empleando el verbo be
able. Es decir, se tiene que emplear el pasado del verbo have (had) y el participio
del verbo be able (been able). Hay que emplear el infinitivo con la partícula to
después de las formas del verbo be able. Ejemplo:
He'd been able to go.
El había podido ir.

EXERCISE 7. Verb Practice.

1. They'd been able to pick up everything.
2. They hadn't been able to pick up everything.
3. Had they been able to pick up everything?
4. Hadn't they been able to pick up everything?
5. Why hadn't they been able to pick up everything?

EXERCISE 8. Verb Practice.

Repeat EXERCISE 7, using forms of the verbs practice, sleep, hear, lose, meet,
leave, lend, let, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 9.
Change the following sentences to the past, future, present perfect, past perfect.
Translate each time.
1. I can use that book.
2. We can't start early.
3. They can bring everything.
4. Can they hear anything from here?
5. Can't he teach English?
6. The boys can show you how to swim.
7. Can the children rest under that tree?
8. The girls can't sing that song.
9. John can invite Alice to the party.
10. Can't Mr. Clark see snow on the mountain?

EXERCISE 10.
Fill the blanks with still or yet, as required, and translate.
1. Are you trying to learn English?
2. Do you have a horse?
3, I haven’t gone. I'm waiting for Bill.
4. Hasn't Bill come? No, not
5. He hasn't been able to finish his work. That's why he's at the office.
6. they're here, but they haven't eaten.
7. I haven't read that book -, but I have it.
8. Isn't she here? No, not. I
9. Can you see the snow on the mountain from bere?
10. Has anyone been able to do any work?

VERBOS DE DOS PALABRAS

to wake up despertar to turn off apagar
to get up levantar To take out sacar
to put on poner to pick out escoger
to take off quitar to pick up recoger
to turn on prender to tum over voltear
En algunos casos, al emplear un pronombre personal como complemento de un
verbo que va acompañado de una partícula tal como up, on, off, out, etc, se
colocará el pronombre personal entre el verbo y la partícula.
En otros casos, al emplear un sustantivo o cualquier pronombre, que no sea
personal, como complemento de un verbo que va acompañado de una partícula tal
como up, on, off, out, etc, se puede colocar el complemento antes o después de la
partícula. Ejemplos:
1. We woke up the boys. (or) We woke the boys up. We woke them up.
2. Mary put on her hat. (or) Mary put her hat on. Mary put it on.
3. I took off my hat. (or) I took my hat off. I took it off.
4. They turned on the radio. (or) They turned the radio on. They turned it on.
5. He turned off the water. (or) He turned the water off. He turned it off.
6. We took the chairs out. (or) We took out the chairs. We took them out.
7. Pick out a suit. (or) Pick a suit out.
Pick out one. (or) Pick one out. (pronombre indefinido, no personal)
8. He picked up his book. (or) He picked his book up.
He picked up his. (or) He picked his up. (pronombre posesivo, no personal)
9. He turned over the page. (or) He turned the page over. He turned it over.

EXERCISE 11. Translate into English. Give two ways when possible.
1. Enciende la luz. 11. Por favor
saque la silla.
2. No la enciendas. 12. Por favor
sácala.
3. Apaguemos el 13. Tengo que
radio. recoger los
papeles.
4. Quiero apagarlo. 14. Recógelos.
5. Voy a ponerme 15. Abre la llave
los zapatos. del agua.
6. No me los puedo 16. Ábrela.
poner
7. No pudimos 17. Ella va a
despertar a Carlos. escoger un
vestido.
8. ¿A qué hora los 18. Ella va a
vas a despertar? escoger uno.
9. ¿Quién puso el 19. Voltea la
radio? página.
10. Ponte el tuyo y 20. Voltéala.
yo me pongo el
mío.

EXERCISE 12. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. She makes a living cleaning houses.
2. He made a living while he was in New York.
3. you can make a living if you try.
4. They've made a living for many years.
5. We'll be able to make a living working for Mr. Jones.
6. Henry has been able to make a living since he finished school.
7. Paul was making a living selling cars.
8. you can make a living as well as I.
9. They can make a living if they work harder.
10. I'll be able to make a better living next year.
EXERCISE 13. Answer the following questions.
1. how do you make a living?
2. Do you make a good living?
3. Do you make a living teaching school?
4. Did you make a living in the United States?
5. Can you make a living working in an office?
6. Are you going to make a living playing baseball?
7. Are you making a living now?
8. Can’t you make a living?
9. Will you be able to make a living? "
10. Have you been able to make a living?

EXERCISE 14. Translate into Spanish.

1. you won’t be ab le to make a good living when you get oId.
2. I'm going to work hard all week so that I can go out of town this weekend.
3. Haven't you made any money yet?
4. you were still eating when I got there.
5. I always have a good time with the Clark family.
6. It doesn't make any difference what he says. I'm sure you're right.
7. The bed looked so soft that I wanted to lie down on it.
8. I'm not going to wear a dress to the party that looks like Mary's.
9. Let me know if you find a small house that's cheap.
10. If he doesn't come, I can't help it.
11. If you look out of the window now, you can see the mountains from here.
12. He walked up to me (se me acercó) and asked me the way to the market.
13. I think that small table Will look nice between the chair and the sofa.
14. Will you be able to hang that picture above the dining room table?
15. He said that he'd been so sick that he hadn't been able to do anything.

EXERCISE 15. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Ask. Close. Cry. Dress.. Answer. Complete. Carry. Disappear. Believe. Change. Die.
Dance. Call. Correct. Drop. Escape,. Clean. Clap. Dictate.

EXERCISE 16. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Be. Able. Break. Catch. Feel. Bring. Be. Born. Cut. Forget. Buy. Blow. Drink. Fly.
Begin. Come.do. Find. Become. Comeback. Eat. Fall(down).

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

1. The wind blows, doesn't it?
2. The wind doesn't blow, does it?
3. Does the wind blow?
4. Doesn't the wind blow?
5. When does the wind blow?
6. The wind blew, didn't it?
7. The wind didn't blow, did it?
8. Did the wind blow?
9. Didn't the wind blow?
10. When did the wind blow?
11. The wind is blowing, isn't it?
12. The wind isn't blowing, is it?
13. Is the wind blowing?
14. Isn't the wind blowing?
15. Why isn't the wind blowing?
16. The Wind is going to blow, isn’t it?
17. The wind isn't going to blow, is it?
18. Is the wind going to blow?
19. Isn't the wind going to blow?
20. When is the wind going to blow?
21. The wind will blow, won't it?
22. The wind won't blow, Will it?
23. Will the wind blow?
24. Won't the wind blow?
25. When Will the wind blow?
26. The wind has blown, hasn't it?
27. The wind hasn't blown, has it?
28. Has the wind blown?
29. Hasn't the wind blown?
30. When has the wind blown?
31. The wind had blown, hadn't it?
32. The wind hadn't blown, had it?
33. Had the wind blown?
34. Hadn't the wind blown? -
35. When had the wind blown?

EXERCISE 18. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 17, using forms of the verbs dig, lend, shine, die, turn over, get old,
make a living, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 19. Read and translate.

THE FARMER AND HIS SONS
The old farmer had worked hard in his orchard all his life so that he could make a
living for his wife and sons. Every spring the old man turned over the soil in the
orchard so that the rain could go into the ground when it fell, and every summer he
sold the fruit in the market. One day the old farmer called his sons to him and said
to them, "I'm getting old, and I don't have much time left in this world. It soon be
time for me to die. As you boys know, I've worked hard all my life; and everything I
have to leave you is in the orchard," "He's left us a treasure in the orchard," thought
the boys. We have to find it." So after the old man died, the boys began to work very
hard in the orchard. They got up every morning to dig in the soil. They dug and dug
around each tree, turning over the soil again and again. The rain fell in the spring,
and the water ran into the soft ground, and the boys still dug in the orchard every
day, looking for the treasure. The warm summer sun shone down on the fruit trees
as the boys worked among them, until one day they saw that it was time to take the
fruit to the market. After they'd dug in the soil for a year, they still hadn't found a
treasure; but there was a lot of fruit, and after they'd sold it in the market, they had
more money than they'd ever had before.

EXERCISE 20. Write in English.

1. Hace rato hacía sol, pero ahora está lloviendo.
2. Me estoy envejeciendo, pero ni modo.
3. Avísame si podrás ir conmigo el lunes.
4. Estamos estudiando inglés para que ganemos mejor.
5. Ya nos habíamos ido cuando vino él.
6. Apaga el radio, por favor. Lo apagué hace un rato.
7. El me dio que creía que las casas en México no estaban caras.
8. Que yo sepa, ellos no habían podido comprar ese terreno.
9. Se ve más azul el cielo que el mar esta mañana. -
10. Esta semana no ha habido clases porque ha estado enfermo el maes tro.

EXERCISE 21. Dictation.

1. The sun is much larger than the moon.
2. Are you still trying to make a living teaching school?
3. The wind from the north is colder than the wind from the south, isn't it1
4. That's the tallest man I've ever seen.
5. I don't want to go out of the room when the class is over.
6. Haven't you been able to go out of town during your vacation?
7. If it's windy or cloudy, we won't go.
8. The boys caught two rabbits, but one of them got away.
9. Do you like scrambled eggs better than fried eggs?
10. You were in a hurry when I saw you yesterday. What happened?

EXERCISE 22. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. When were you born?
2. When did he die?
3. When did it rain?
4. When did it snow?'
5. how long have you lived in Mexico?
6. how long have you studied English?
7. how long had you studied English before going to the United States?
8. how long had you been there when John carne?
9. how long had you lived in Mexico when your father died?
10. how long had you worked at Ford when you left?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
11. Is the sun still shining?
12. Is the moon still shining?
13. Is it still raining?
14. Is it still cloudy?
15. Was it sunny yesterday?
16. Have you already finished?
17. Has she already eaten?
18. Haven't you finished yet?
19. Hasn't he come yet?
20. Hasn't it rained yet?
21. Are you younger than your brother?
22. Is Acapulco warmer than Veracruz?
23. Is Acapulco the warmest place in Mexico?
24. Are you taller than your father?
25. Are you the tallest one in the family?
26. Are you shorter than your father?
27. Are you the shortest one in the family? "
28. Are you older than your brother?
29. Are you the oldest one in the family?
30. Will there be classes on Monday?
31. Will you be able to lend me the money?
32. Will you be able to speak tonight?
33. Has it been cold all day?
34. Have you been hungry all day?
35. Was it windy yesterday?

LESSON 6.
VOCABULARY.
1. to knock, knocked, tocar 15. wheat trigo
knocked
2. to save, saved, saved salvar; ahorrar; 16. shade sombra
guardar
3. to watch, watched, observar; vigilar 17. cloud nube
watched
4. to kiss, kissed, kissed besar 18. arm brazo
5. to cover, covered, cubrir , tapar 19. leg pierna
covered
6. to last, lasted, lasted durar 20. foot pie
7. forever para siempre feet pies
8. foolish tonto 21. clothes ropa
9. lazy perezoso, flojo 22. coat abrigo
10. noise ruido 23. overcoat abrigo de
invierno
noisy ruidoso; 24. raincoat impermeable
escandaloso
11. ant hormiga 25. address dirección
12. pasture pastura 26. leaf hoja
13. grain grano leaves hojas
14. corn maíz; elote

IDIOMS.
1 to try hard hacer lo posible por, esforzarse por
2. to get ready alistarse, preprarse
3. day after day día tras dia
4. as usual como de,costumbre
5. as if como si
6. I wonder me pregunto.
no wonder No es de extrañar,con razón
7. at noon al mediodía
8. by car en coche
by bus en camión
by plane en avión
by train en tren
by ship en barco
9. There'd been work. Había habido trabajo.
There'd been chiidren; Habia habido niños.

EXERRCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. Don't fall.
2. Don't let them fall.
3. They'd fallen.
4. They hadn't fallen.
5. They'd been able to rest.
6. They hadn't been able to rest.
7. Had they been able to rest?
8. Hadn't they been able to rest?
9. There'll be classes tomorrow.
10. There won't be any classes tomorrow.
11. There've been classes all week.
12. There haven't been classes all week.
13. I've been hungry all morning.
14. I haven't been hungry all morning.
15. It's been cold all day.
16. It hasn't been cold all day.
17. It's been hot all afternoon.
18. It hasn't been hot all afternoon.
19. It'll be cold next week.
20. It won't be cold next week.

COMPARACIÓN DE ADJETIVOS y ADVERBIOS DE MÁS DE UNA SÍLABA EL

GRADO COMPARATIVO DE SUPERIORIDAD
Los adjetivos y adverbios de más de una sílaba forman el comparativo de
superioridad usando la palabra more antes del adjetivo o adverbio, Cuando se usa
la palabra que en español, el adjetivo o el adverbio irá seguido de la palabra than
en inglés.

EL GRADO SUPERLATIVO DE SUPERIORIDAD

Los adjetivos y adverbios de más de una sílaba forman el superlativo de
superioridad usando las palabras the most antes del adjetivo o adverbio. En esta
regla se incluyen también los adverbios terminados en Iy, que equivale a mente en
español, Ejemplos: slowly, more slowly than, the most slowly, quickly, more quickly
than, the most quickly pero; early, earlier than, the earliest (aunque la palabra early
consta de.dos sílabas, la terminación ly no equivale a mente. Ejemplos:
Adjetives and adverbs Comparative Degree Superlative Degree
lncreasing Scale lncreasing Scale
softly more softly than the most softly
beautiful more beautiful than the most beautiful
comfortable more comfortable than the most comfortable
complete more complete than the most complete
correct more correct than the most correct
careful more careful than the most careful
carefully more carefully than the most carefully
difficult more difficult than the most difficult
dangerous more dangerous than the most dangerous
expensive more expensive than the most expensive
interesting more interesting than the most interesting
important more important than the most important
impossible more impossible than the most impossible
possible more possible than the most possible
quickly more quickly than the most quickly
slowly more slowly than the most slowly
selfish more selfish than the most selfish
useful more useful than the most useful

EXERCISE 2. Fill the blanks with the comparative degree of the adjective or adverb
indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(beautiful) 1. Helen's dress is than Mary's.
(comfortable) 2. That chair is than the sofa.
(complete) 3. This exercise is than the other one.
(difficult) 4. Do you think the second lesson is than the first one?
(dangerous) 5. Is the road to Acapulco than the one to Veracruz?
(expensive) 6. Clothes are every year.
(interesting) 7. This book is than that one.
(important) 8. The verbs are much than the adjectives.
(slowly) 9. time passes much when we aren't working.
(quickly) 10. I'm sure he'll learn how.to speak English much than his brother.

EXERCISE 3. Fill the blanks with the superlative degree of the adjective or adverb
indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(selfish) 1. He's the man that I've ever known.
(useful) 2. This is the thing that I have.
(dangerous) 3. Is the lion the animal in Africa?
(correct) 4. Bill has written the sentence.
(important) 5. This lesson is the one in the book.
(expensive) 6. This is the coat we have in the store.
(interesting) 7. This is the movie I've seen this year.
(difficult) 8. Of Spanish, English, and French which is the to learn?
(expensive) 9. Which of these cars is the ?
(difficult) 10. The first book is the one we have.

EXERCISE 4.
Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as required, of the
adjective or adverb indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(beautiful) 1. I think summer is the time of the year.
(useful) 2. Why do you think that English is much than French?
(dangerous) 3. Are planes than trains?
(correct) 4. She said that my pronunciation was the
(complete) 5. I want to find a book a little than this one.
(difficult) 6. This kind of cake is the to make.
(beautiful) 7. They have the clothes in that store.
(softly) 8. She speaks than the other children.
(possible) 9. It's to reach the moon now than it was twenty years ago.
(selfish) 10. Do you think that girls are than boys?
EXERCISE 5. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following
adjectives and adverbs (increasing scale).
angry black dirty full
big clean early green
blue cold easy good
bad close (to empty happy
busy cheap fine hungry

EXERCISE 6. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as

required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and Translate (increasing scale).
(noisy) 1. I live on the street in Mexico City.
(thirsty) 2. Are you than your brother?
(cheap) 3. Are Ford cars than Buicks?
(large) 4. Which of these animals is the ?
(good) 5. Is this your dress?
(good) 6. I like Mexico City than Veracruz
(bad) 7. That sick child is today.
(bad) 8. I have the class in school.
(happy) 9. My parents are much in Mexico City than they were in the United States.
(busy) 10. We are much now than we were last year.

EXERCISE 7. Translate into English. Give two ways when possible.

1. Ponte el vestido. 8. Despiértame temprano.
2. Póntelo. 9. Apaguémosla. televisión.
3. Ponte los tuyos y yo me pongo el 10. No la apaguemos.
mío.
4.Juan va a ponerla 11. Abre la llave de la cocina.
5. Íbamos a apagarla. 12. No la abras.
6. Él no quiso encenderla 13. Quisimos sacar la mesa.
7. A él le gusta despertarme. 14. No la saqué.

EXERCISE 8. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. There'd been a lot of parties.
2. There hadn't been a lot of parties.
3. Had there been a lot of parties?
4. Hadn’t there been a lot of parties?
5. There's been a lot of rain this month.
6. There hasn't been much rain this month.
7. Has there been a lot of rain this month?
8. Hasn't there been a lot of rain this month?
9. They'd been sleepy all morning.
10. They hadn't been sleepy all morning.
11. Had they been sleepy all morning?
12. Hadn't they been sleepy all morning?
13. It'd been very hot.
14. It hadn't been very hot.
15. Had it been very hot?
16. Hadn't it been very hot?
17. I'd had to speak very hard.
18. I hadn't had to speak very hard.
19. You'd had to work every day.
20. you hadn't had to work every day.
21. Had you had to work every day?
22. Hadn't you had to work every day?

EXERCISE 9. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. He tried hard to speak English.
2. We'll try hard to finish by five o'clock.
3. They've tried hard to make more money.
4. She's going to try hard to visit the United States next year.
5. Helen and Martha were trying hard to swim across the river.
6. Richard tried hard to learn Spanish.
7.Her little daughter tried hard to make a cake.
8. He tried hard to drink all the milk.
9. He tried hard to leave at noon.
10. The children try hard to practice their English every day.

EXERCISE 10. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did you try hard to read that book?
2. Do they try hard to answer in English?
3. Have you tried hard to visit Acapulco?
4. Have they tried hard to find a house that's warm?
5. Will he try hard to buy a new car next year?
6. Does your father try hard to go to the office every day?
7. Will she try hard to go out of town this weekend?
8. Did he try hard to drink all the milk?
9. Will you try hard to get work?
10. Are you going to try hard to come to my birthday party?

EXERCISE 11. Translate into Spanish.

1. No wonder he makes so much money if he works from eight o'clock in the morning
until nine at night.
2. It’s already noon, and they haven't come yet.
3. Are you speaking English as usual?
4. This soup looks like dirty water.
5. Mrs. Nelson is getting old.
6. We tried hard to put all the things in the car, but there wasn't enough room.
7. I don’t think you’ll have a good time if you go out of town during your vacation.
8. It's hard to make a living teaching English.
9. you were right. We visited this place two years ago.
10. We've had to get up early every day this week so that we can get to the office
before eight o'clock.
11. He caught two chickens, but both of them got away.
12. They'd already gone to bed before I got sleepy.
13. There've been many Americans in Mexico this summer.
14. Will there be enough time for us to get to the market before it closes?
15. There's been so much rain this summer that we haven't been able to go out a
great deal.

EXERCISE 12. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
fix hurry like laugh
finish invite learn love
fill jump look like need
form kill look (at) open
help live look (for) pass

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
go give up get sleepy get off
go back get get thirsty get married
go to bed get up get old get away
go to sleep get angry get ready get rich
go out (at) get to (here, there) have
give get mad (at)

EXERCISE 14.
Verb Practice
1. She usually knocks on the door.
2. She doesn't usually knock on the door.
3. Does she usually knock on the door?
4. Doesn't she usually knock on the door?
5. Why doesn't she usually knock on the door?
6. She knocked on the window.
7. She didn’t knock on the window.
8. Did she knock on the window?
9. Didn't she knock on the window?
10. Why didn't she knock on the window?
11. She wants to knock on the door.
12. She doesn't want to knock on the door.
13. Does she want to knock on the door?
14. Doesn't she want to knock on the door?
15. Why doesn't she want to knock on the door?
16. She has to knock on the window.
17. She doesn't have to knock on the window.
18. Does she have to knock on the window?
19. Doesn't she have to knock on the window?
20, Why does she have to knock on the window?
21. She'd knocked on the door.
22. She hadn't knocked on the door.
23. Had she knocked on the door?
24. Hadn’t she knocked on the door?
25. Why hadn’t she knocked on the door?
26. She's been able to knock on the window.
27. She hasn't been able to knock on the window.
28. Has she been able to knock on the window?
29. Hasn’t she been able to knock on the window?
30. Why hasn’t she been able to knock on the window?
31. She'd been able to knock on the door.
32. She hadn't been able to knock on the door.
33. Had she been able to knock on the door?
34. Hadn't she been able to knock on the door?
35. Why hadn't she been able to knock on the door?

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 14, using forms of the verbs save, watch, kiss, cover, last, get
ready, try hard, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb;
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 16. Read and translate.

THE ANT AND THE GRASSHOPPER (CHAPULÍN)
It was summer, and the warm sun shone down on the pasture where the ant and the
grasshopper had lived since spring. The ant, as usual. was working. She was always
working. Day after day she carried grains of wheat and corn to her house so she
could have plenty of food for the winter. The grasshopper was always flying around
(dando vueltas) in the soft wind, singing and playing. He sang and played all day.
“Why work and save food for the winter when there's enough to eat lying on the
ground?" he asked. One day as the grasshopper sat in the shade watching the ant
carry a very large grain of wheat, the grasshopper said to the ant. Why are you so
foolish? you work all day and never have any fun. Don't you know that summer is a
time to be happy?" “Summer won’t last forever”, replied the ant. What will you do
when winter comes and there's snow on the ground? you won't have anything to eat,
and you won't be able to find any food. Why are you so lazy?" “I'm not hungry yet,"
answered the grasshopper, as he flew away singing (voló cantando). The ant went
back to her work, carrying grains of wheat and corn. Soon her house was full of
food, so she closed the door and began to get ready for winter. The next morning
the wind blew from the north, bringing rain and snow with it. The flowers in the field
died, the leaves fell off the trees, and clouds covered the sun. The poor
grasshopper had no place to go. He was tired and hungry, and his wings were so
cold that he couldn't fly. Then he began to think of the ant, warm and safe in her
house full of food; so, he knocked on the door of the ant's house. “Please give me
something to eat", the grasshopper said when the ant opened the door. I'm cold and
hungry and there's no food. "What were you doing all summer while I was working?"
asked the ant, "I was singing", answered the grasshopper. "Well, dance now," said
the ant as she closed the door in the grasshopper's face.
EXERCISE 17. Write in English.
1. Dame tu dirección para que te escriba.
2. Con razón nunca has podido aprender inglés. Nunca vas a clase.
3. Ya nos habíamos ido cuando vino mi tío, ¿verdad?
4. Cuando salí estaba lloviendo muy fuerte, así es que me tapé la cabeza con un
periódico.
5. No habrá clases mañana, así es que no me despiertes temprano.
6. No ha habido suficiente lluvia este verano, y se está secando (dying) todo el
pasto.
7. No sé por qué he tenido tanta hambre toda la mañana. Comí bastante en (for) el
desayuno.
8. ¿Va tu tío por avión o por tren?
9. ¿A qué hora crees que podrás acabar mi vestido?
10. Estas son las flores más hermosas que jamás (ever) he visto.

EXERCISE 18. Dictation.

1. Her dress looks more expensive than mine, doesn’t it?
2. I had a very good time while I was in Monterrey.
3. If your cousin comes by plane, she'll arrive at ten o'clock.
4. No wonder your flowers died. you haven't given them any water for a month, have
you?
5. my mother writes the most interesting letters that I've ever read.
6. He said that he hadn't been able to speak since he lost his books.
7. Will they be able to see if they sit behind us?
8. It's been so cold all winter that we haven't been able to work in the garden.
9. Was it hot in Chicago when you were there?
10. If it looks like rain, take your raincoat.

EXERCISE 19. Conversation. Answer the following questions.

1. What did you take your raincoat for?
2. Where did your parents come from?
3. Who did you talk to?
4. Who did you go with?
5. What's that movie about?
6. What are you talking about?
7. how long have you lived on Madison Street?
8. how long has he been there?
9. how long had you been there when it began to rain?
10. how long had he lived in Mexico before he left?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
11. Is Alice more beautiful than Mary?
12. Is English more difficult than Spanish?
13. Are planes more dangerous than trains?
14. Is television more interesting than the movies?
15. Is English more useful than Spanish?
16. Is Jane the most beautiful girl in the office?
17. Is this the most comfortable chair in the house?
18. Is this the most interesting book you have?
19. Is Mexico City the most important city in Mexico?
20. Are raincoats cheaper than overcoats?
21. Is English easier than Spanish?
22. Is Spanish harder than English?
23. Do you get up earlier than Henry?
24. Are you bigger than your brother?
25. Is this the noisiest street in the city?
26. Is this the best one you could buy?
27. Is he the richest man in the world?
28. Is February the shortest month of the year?
29. Did you get tired?
30. Did you get sleepy?
31. Did you get thirsty?
32. Did you get married?
33. Did you get mad?
34. Is it windy today?
35. Was it cloudy this morning?

LESSON 7.
VOCABULARY.
1. to stay, stayed, Quedar, alojar 14. building edificio
stayed
2. to feed, fed, fed alimentar 15. fortune fortuna
3, to hide, hid, Esconder, ocultar 16. peace paz
hidden
4. to spend, spent, Gastar, pasar 17. music música
spent
5, to travel, Viajar 18. meal comida
traveled, traveled
6. to worry, Preocupar. 19. news noticias
worried, worried.
7. dark oscuro 20. trip viaje.
8. heavy pesado 21. God Dios
9. loud Ruidoso, chillante. 22. town pueblo.
10. huge gigantesco, 23. beans frijoles
enorme
11. own propio 24. nut nuez
owner dueño 25. station estación
12. excitement emoción 26. light claro; liviano,
ligero
13. remains Permanece, restos

IDIOMS.
1. to wear out acabar my shoes wore out. Mis zapatos se
acabaron
to wear gastar I wore them out. Los gasté.
2. to feel at home Sentirse en casa 3. to get wet mojarse
to get your hair, Mojarse cabello, 4. Don't worry No te preocupes
feet, etc. wet pies, etc. about me (him, etc) por mi, (él, etc.)
5. such as tal(es) como 6. such (a) + noun tal, semeante +
sust
such a car tal coche such boys semejantes
muchachos
such snow tal nieve 7. to fit, fit, fit venir (ropa)
The suit fits me. El traje me viene Did the suit fit ¿Te vino el traje?
you?
They didn't fit me. No me vinieron. 8. It makes me sick Me hace daño.
They don't make No me hacen daño. 9. how long is your ¿cuánto dura tu
me sick. class? clase?
It's an hour long. Dura una hora. How long is her ¿qué tan largo es
hair? su cabello?
It isn’t very long. No es muy largo.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. Let's lend him the money.
2. Let's pay him now.
3. Let them watch TV.
4. Don't let them watch TV.
5. It’s rained every day this week.
6. It hasn't rained every day this week.
7. There'd been a lot of snow.
8. There hadn't been a lot of snow.
9. Had there been a lot of snow?
10. Hadn't there been a lot of snow?
11. There've been a lot of birthdays this month.
12. There haven't been a lot of birthdays this month.
13. He's been thirsty since two o'clock.
14. He hasn't been thirsty since two o'clock.
15. They'd been hungry many times.

THE CONDITIONAL EL POSPRETÉRlTO

Se forma el pospretérito (conditional) usando el auxiliar would, seguido del infinitivo
sin la partícula to. Equivale el auxiliar would a las terminaciones del pospretérito en
castellano ía, ías, íamos, ían. La contracción negativa de would not es wouldn't. Se
forma la contracción en afirmativo con la partícula d agregada al pronombre. Esta
contracción no se emplea en la forma afirmativa más que acompañada del infinitivo
sin la partícula to. Fíjese que la contracción en afirmativo en el pospretérito
(conditional) es idéntica a la del antecopretérito (past perfect). Pero no se puede
confundir si Ud. recuerda que la contracción en afirmativo del antecopretérito (past
perfect) siempre va acompañada del participio pasado, mientras que la del
pospretérito (conditional) siempre va acompañada del infinitivo sin la partícula to.
Ejemplos.
Afirmativo sin contracción Afirmativo con contracción
I would work yo trabajaría I'd work yo trabajaría
you would work Tu trabajarías you'd work Tú trabajarías
he would work él trabajaría he'd work él trabajaría
she would work ella trabajaría she'd work ella trabajaría
it would work trabajaría it'd work trabajaría
we would work trabajaríamos we'd work trabajaríamos
you would work Uds. trabajarían you'd work Uds. trabajarían
They would work ellos trabajarían they'd work ellos trabajarían

Negativo
I wouldn’t eat Yo no comería
you wouldn’t eat Tu no comerías
Alex wouldn’t eat Alex no comería
Sule wouldn’t eat Sule no comería
it wouldn’t eat No comería.
we wouldn’t eat No comeríamos.
you wouldn’t eat Ustedes no
comerían.
They wouldn’t eat Ellos no comerían.

Interrogativo Interrogativo Negativo

Auxiliar, sustantivo o pronombre, verbo.
Would I speak? ¿estudiaría yo? Wouldn’t I speak? ¿no hablaría yo?
Would you speak? ¿estudiarías? Wouldn’t you ¿no hablarías?
speak?
Would Omar ¿estudiaría Omar? Wouldn’t Omar ¿no hablaría
speak? speak? Omar?
Would Sofi speak? ¿estudiaría Sofi? Wouldn’t Sofi ¿no hablaría Sofi?
speak?
Would the cat ¿estudiaría el Wouldn’t the cat¿no hablaría el
speak? gato? speak? gato?
Would we speak? ¿estudiaríamos? Wouldn’t we ¿no hablaríamos?
speak?
Would you speak? ¿estudiarían Wouldn’t you ¿no hablarían
ustedes? speak? ustedes?
Wou ld t he bo ys ¿e stu d ia ría n lo s Wou ld n ’t t he b oys ¿n o h ab la rí an lo s
sp e a k? ch ico s? sp e a k? ch ico s?
EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.
1. He'd play football.
2. He wouldn't play football.
3. Would he play football?
4. Wouldn't he play football?
5. What would he play?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 2, using forms of the verbs dance, understand, die, blow, shine,
rest, stop, win, kill, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 4. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives, and adverbs (increasing scale).
Hot. Light. Near. Pure.
Hard. Long. Narrow. Pretty.
Kind. Large. Noisy. Quick.
Little. Lazy. Old. Red.
Late. Nice. Poor. Rich.

EXERCISE 5. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives and adverbs (increasing scale).
Beautiful. Difficult. Impossible. Useful.
Comfortable. Dangerous. Polite. Useless.
Complete. Expensive. Possible.
Correct. Foolish. Simple.
Careful. Interesting. Usual.

EXERCISE 6. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as

required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(difficult) 1. The Lessons are in the second book.
(lazy) 2. Those are the people in the world.
(useful) 3. Is English than Spanish?
(polite) 4. Are Mexicans than Americans?
(ungry) 5. I'm always than you.
(light) 6. Your books are than mine.
(rich) 7. Who is the man in Mexico?
(old) 8. This is the building in the city.
(comfortable) 9. Planes are than trains.
(beautiful) 10. The girl in school is in my class.
(noisy) 11. The boys in my class are than the girls.
(pretty) 12. The girls will dance-tonight.
(red) 13. Your curtains are than your rug.
(interesting) 14. We saw the movie last night.
(poor) 15. He is than I was when I was young.

THE CONDITIONAL OF CAN. EL POSPRETÉRITO DE CAN

Puesto que el auxiliar can existe solamente en el presente (can) y en el pasado
(could), se forma el pospretérito (conditional) empleando el verbo be able. Es decir,
se tiene que emplear el auxiliar would seguido por el infinitivo to be able sin la
partícula to. Hay que usar el infinitivo con la partícula to después de las formas del
verbo be able. Could también equivale al pospretérito de poder (podría), así es que
existen dos maneras de traducir podría en inglés. Ejemplos:
They could go They would be able to go.
Ellos pudieron ir. Ellos podrían ir.
They couldn't go. They wouldn't be able to go.
Ellos no pudieron ir. Ellos no podrían ir.

EXERCISE 7. Verb Practice.

1. They'd be able to do everything.
2. They wouldn't be able to do everything.
3. Would they be able to do everything?
4. Wouldn't they be able to do everythin?
5. how much would they be able to do?

EXERCISE 8. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 7, using forms of the verbs ask, answer, give, cut, cry, break,
become, begin, drop, in short sentences. Use o different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 9. Change these sentences to the past, future, present perfect, past
perfect, and conditional. Translate each time.
1. They can escape from that building.
2. He can drink all the milk.
3. They can come back.
4. We can close the store at nine o'clock.
5. you can come back.
6. I can catch those mice.
7. She can sing that song.
8. That bird can fly out of the house.
9. John can put on his new shoes.
10. My mother can pick out a new dress.

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. His shoes wore out.
2. My raincoat is wearing out.
3. All their clothes have worn out.
4. Those suits wear out easily.
5. It can wear out.
6. He'll wear out his shoes.
7. She wore out her coat.
8. I'm going to wear out it.
9. John wore out his suit.
10. The children have worn out it.

EXERCISE 11. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did Olm's hat wear out?
2. Is your sister's raincoat wearing out?
3. Have the children's shoes worn out?
4. Can it wear out?
5. Were their shoes wearing out?
6. Would that suit wear out?
7. Did you wear out your sweater?
8. Has he worn it out?
9. Do you want to wear your new shoes out?
10. Will they wear them out soon?

EXERCISE 12 Translate into Spanish.

1. You.re right. The child looks like his father.
2. They tried hard to make a lot of money, but they died poor.
3. He won’t be able to buy a new suit when this one wears out.
4. He has to work so hard to make a living that he doesn’t have any time to have
fun.
5. 1 still think that Albert is right.
6. We haven’t visited his mother yet.
7. This hat doesn’t fit me. It’s too big.
8. If your shoes don’t fit you, they’ll soon wear out.
9. Don’t worry about us if we aren’t at home at three-thirty.
10. how long will a new dress last?
11. Does it make you sick to fly?
12. how long is your hair?
13. how long is the English class?
14. Your new raincoat has already started to wear out.
15. Those green apples are going to make you sick.

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Open. Practice. Rain. Stop.
Pass. Pronounce. Rest. Show.
Pick Out. Play. Speak. Snow.
Pick Up. Reply. Stay. Shout (at).
Place. Reach. Start. Spill.

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Hear. Lie down. Make. Read.
Hang. Let. Meet. Run.
Hide. Lay eggs. Put. Say.
Know. Lend. Put on. See.
Leave. Lose. Pay. Speak.
EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.
1. The President stays in that hotel, doesn't he?
2. The President doesn't stay in that hotel, does he?
3. The President stayed in that hotel, didn't he?
4. The President didn't stay in that hotel, did he?
5. The President is staying in that hotel, isn't he?
6. The President isn't staying in that hotel, is he?
7. The President was staying in that hotel, wasn't he?
8. The President wasn't staying in that hotel, was he?
9. The President is going to stay in that hotel, isn't he?
10. The President isn't going to stay in that hotel, is he?
11. The President was going to stay in that hotel, wasn’t he?
12. The President wasn't going to stay in that hotel, was he?
13. The President liked to stay in that hotel, didn’t he?
14. The President didn't like to stay in that hotel, did he?
15. The President wanted to stay in that hotel, didn't he?
16. The President didn't want to stay in that hotel, did he?
17. The President had to stay in that hotel, didn't he?
18. The President didn't have to stay in that hotel, did he?
19. The President can stay in that hotel, can't he?
20. The President can't stay in that hotel, can he?
21. The President could stay in that hotel, couldn't he?
22. The President couldn't stay in that hotel, could he?
23. The President will be able to stay in that hotel, won't he?
24. The President won't be able to stay in that hotel, will he?
25. The President has stayed in that hotel, hasn't he?
26. The President hasn't stayed in that hotel, has he?
27. The President had stayed in that hotel, hadn't he?
28. The President hadn't stayed in that hotel, had he?
29. The President has been able to stay in that hotel, hasn't he?
30. The President hasn't been able to stay in that hotel, has he?
31. The President had been able to stay in that hotel, hadn't he?
32. The President hadn't been able to stay in that hotel, had he?
33. The President would stay in that hotel, wouldn't he?
34. The President wouldn't stay in that hotel, would he?
35. The President would be able to stay in that hotel, wouldn't he?
36. The President wouldn't be able to stay in that hotel, would he?

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Repeat EXERCISE 15, using forms of the verbs travel, worry, spend, feed, hide, get
wet, get your har (feet, etc wet) wear out , wear (something) out , feel at home, in
short sentences. Use a different noun
or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 17. Read and translate.

THE COUNTRY MOUSE AND THE TOWN MOUSE
A country mouse, who had a friend in town, invited his city friend to spend some
time with him in the country. The country mouse tried hard to make his visitor from
the city as comfortable as possible; so, he fed him all kinds of simple country food
such as beans, cheese, nuts, apples, wheat, and com. But the town mouse wasn't
happy in the country. He liked the noise and excitement of the city and the different
kinds of food that he could have there. "Aren't you tired of living in the country?" the
town mouse asked his friend. "Why do you stay here day after day doing nothing?
Come to the city with me, and I’ll show you how to live. A mouse, you know, doesn't
live forever; and I’ll show you what life is like (cómo es la vida) in town." "I'd like to
visit the city someday," answered the country mouse. So, at last, the two mice
started for the city. It was dark when they reached the big house where the city
mouse lived. On the table were the remains of a huge meal. They were both tired
and hungry, and the town mouse gave the country mouse all kinds of rich an
expensive food to eat. The country mouse began to feel at home in this new place,
and he thanked God for his good fortune and such a nice change in his way of life.
He had never thought that he'd be able to live in such comfort. Just then he heard a
loud noise outside the door. "What's that?" asked the country mouse. Oh, that's only
the owner's dog," replied the town mouse. "Only" said the visitor. "I don't like that
kind of music with my meals." At that moment some people came into the room with
two huge dogs. The two mice jumped off the table and hid in a corner of the room.
After the people and the dogs had gone, the country mouse said to his friend, "This
fine way of living is all right for those who like it, but it's better to eat simple food in
peace than to eat fine food when you're afraid. Good-bye."

EXERCISE 18. Write in English.

1. ¿Cuánto tiempo te durarán los nuevos zapatos?
2. Quítate ese sombrero y ponte el verde.
3. La semana pasada me mojé todos los días.
4. Le gustaría a Ud. vivir en Chicago durante el invierno?
5. Si te mojas el cabello, te hará daño.
6. Mi papá dijo que no podríamos ir en avión.
7. Por qué no has podido encontrar un sombrero que te venga?
8. No podremos esperarte (meet you) en la estación, pero no te preocupes.
9. Ellos han tenido que viajar mucho durante este año.
10. No hemos podido quedarnos mucho tiempo (very long) en un lugar.

EXERCISE 19. Dictation.

1. I told him that he'd have a good time if he spent his vacation with you.
2. The trip was very long, but we weren't tired when we got there.
3. I told you those shoes weren't very good. I knew they'd soon wear out.
4. Would you like to have dinner with me on Sunday?
5. She turned over that bucket of water and got her dress wet.
6. Don't walk in that water, or you'll get your feet wet.
7. A man such as Omar will feel at home in my country.
8. This is the most beautiful dress that I've ever seen, but it doesn't fit me.
9. It's easier to go by car than by train.
10. The nights are very dark when the moon isn't shining.
EXERCISE 20. Conversation Answer the following questions.
1. how long is your English class?
2. how long was the movie?
3. how long is your hair?
4. how long have you lived in Mexico?
5. how long have you been in Acapulco?
6. Where did you spend your vacation?
7. Where did you spend your money?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
8. Do you feel at home at your cousin's house?
9. Did you feel at home among so many Americans?
10. Does that suit fit you?
11. Does that hat fit you?
12. Has your suit worn out?
13. Did you get wet yesterday?
14. Do you get wet when it rains?
15. Do you worry about your family?
16. Did you worry about me?
17. Did you spend your vacation in Acapulco?
18. Did you spend any time in Chicago?
19. Do you like to travel by car?
20. Do you like to travel by plane?
21. Would you like to live in Mexico?
22. Would you like to visit the United States?
23. Would you like to go with us?
24. Wouldn't he come?
25. Wouldn't she speak?

LESSON 8.
VOCABULARY.
1. To build, built, construir freedom libertad
built.
2. to mean, meant, significar 15. wolf lobo
meant.
3. to tie, tied, tied. amarrar wolves lobos
4. to keep, kept, guardar 16. thief Ladrón
kept.
5. to fight, fought, pelear thieves ladrones
fought.
6. to prefer, preferir 17. skin piel
preferred,
preferred.
7. hardly apenas 18. bone hueso
8. exact exacto, 20. mark marca
exactly exactamente, 21. chain cadena
9. together juntos 22. watch reloj
10. bright brillante 23. roof techo
11. tight apretado 24. surprise sorpresa
12. fat gordo 25. bathing suit traje.de baño
13. ugly feo 26. elevator elevador
14. free libre; gratis 27. decreasing escala
scale descendente

IDIOMS.
1. to shake hands Estrechar las 7. It's out of order. Está fuera de
manos servicio
2. to get drunk emborracharse It doesn’t work. No funciona.
3. to get sick enfermarse 8. What a pity. Qué pena.
4. to tie up Atar, amarrar 9. Would you ¿Te gustaría ...?
like..?
5. one by one uno por uno Would you like to ¿Te gustaría ir al
go to the movies? cine?
6. side by side Lado a lado 10. There'd be Habría trabajo.
work.
There'd be Habría niños.
children.

EXERCISE 1
Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.
1. Hide in the bedroom.
.2. Don't hide in the bedroom.
3. Let's hide in the bedroom.
4. Let's not hide in the bedroom.
5. What are you hiding behind the sofa for?
6. Who are you hiding from?
7. What are you hiding from?
8. What have you hidden behind the sofa for?
9. Who have you hidden from?
10. What have you hidden from?
11. You'd hide under the bed.
12. You wouldn't hide under the bed.
13. Would you hide under the bed?
14. Wouldn't you hide under the bed?
15. You'd be able to hide under the table.
16. you wouldn't be able to hide under the table.
17. Would you be able to hide under the table?
18. Wouldn't you be able to hide under the table?
19. He'll have to get off at the next comer.
20. He won't have to get off at the next comer.

EL GRADO COMPARATIVO DE INFERIORIDAD

Se forma el grado comparativo de inferioridad de los adjetivos y adverbios
colocando la palabra less menos) antes del adjetivo o adverbio, cualquiera que sea
el número de sílabas de éstos. Cuando se usa la palabra que en castellano equivale
a than en inglés. Ejemplos:
less cold than menos frfo que
less easily than menos fácilmente que ;
less beautiful than menos hermoso que
less ugly than menos feo que
less carefully than con menos cuidado que
less difficult than menos diffcil que

EL GRADO SUPERLATIVO DE INFERIORIDAD

Se forma el grado superlativo de inferioridad de los adjetivos y adverbios colocando
las palabras the least el menos) antes del adjetivo o adverbio. Ejemplos:
the least cold el menos frfo ;
the least easily con menos facilidad "
the least beautiful el menos hermoso
the least ugly el menos feo
the least carefully con menos cuidado
the least difficult lo menos diffcil

EXERCISE 2. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives and adverbs (decreasing scale).
bright pretty green wide
tight clean kind far
fat correct noisy bad
ugly easy warm young
free difficult weak loud

EXERCISE 3. Fill the blanks with the comparative degree of the adjective or adverb
indicated and translate (decreasing scale).
(heavy) 1. My books are than yours.
(light) 2. This stone is than the other one.
(dark) 3. Are the nights than before?
(hard) 4. English is than Spanish.
(noisy) 5. The street that we live on now is than the one that we lived on before.
(polite) 6. Why are these children than those?
(poor) 7. The people in our city are than those in the country.
(poor) 8. My husband is than yours;
(busy) 9. I am today than yesterday.
(full) 10. The glass is than the bucket.

EXERCISE 4. Fill the blanks with the superlative degree of the adjective or adverb
indicated and translate (decreasing scale).
(wide) 1. This street is the of all of them.
(beautiful) 2. Mary is the of the three girls.
(clean) 3. The bedroom is the of all the rooms in the house.
(interesting) 4. Of Cuernavaca, Toluca, and Taxco, Toluca is the .
(red) 5. The street that we live on now is than the one that we lived on before.
(pretty) 6. Does this little bird sing the of all of them?
(comfortable) 7. Of all the chairs in the house, this one is the .
(warm) 8. Is this room the in the house?
(easy) 9. This book is the to read.
(kind) 10. Of all the teachers in the school Mr. Simons is the .

EXERCISE 5. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as

required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (decreasing scale).
(tight) 1. My overcoat is than my raincoat.
(bright) 2. The moon is than the sun.
(expensive) 3. Are Ford cars the of all the cars?
(cheap) 4. Are Buicks than Fords?
(Loud) 5. The children from that school sing than those.
(warm) 6. This suit is the of all my suits.
(hot) 7. Of all the cities in Mexico this one is the .
(cold) 8. It's today than it was yesterday.
(tall) 9. Are Mexican women than American women?
(near) 10. Of the house, the school, and the market, the school is the .

EXERCISE 6. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives and adverbs (increasing scale).
small strong tired ugly
sick short tall weak
sad safe thick wide
slow sharp thin warm
soon soft tight white

EXERCISE 7. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives and adverbs (increasing scale).
slowly complete dangerous usual
softly correct expensive important
useful careful exact impossible
beautiful carefully interesting quickly
comfortable difficult foolish polite

EXERCISE 8. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as

required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and Translate (increasing scale).
(foolish) 1. She's than her husband.
(slowly) 2. We'll walk when we go out today.
(soon) 3. I can get there than you.
(safe) 4. This is the place to hide the money.
(white) 5. The clouds are the big ones.
(thick) 6. The green rug is than the blue one.
(interesting) 7. I had the conversation with my teacher.
(quickly) 8. We can do the work than they.
(tired) 9. My husband is today than he was last week.
(strong) 10. Is this the chain you could find?

EXERCISE 9. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. There'll be a party on the 10th of June.
2. There won't be a party on the first of March.
3. Will there be a party on the 3rd of July?
4. There'll be time to eat before two o'clock.
5. There won't be time to eat before two o'clock.
6. Will there be time to eat before two o'clock?
7. I'd be hungry.
8. I wouldn’t be hungry.
9. He'd be afraid.
10. He wouldn't be afraid.
11. It'd be cold.
12. It wouldn't be cold.
13. You'd have to go early.
14. you wouldn’t have to go early.
15. Would you have to go early?
16. Wouldn't you have to go early?
17. It's raining today.
18. It isn't raining today.
19. It rained yesterday.
20. It didn't rain yesterday.

EL USO DEL GERUNDIO DESPUÉS DE LAS PREPOSICIONES

En inglés se emplea el gerundio después de las preposiciones, mientras que en
castellano se usa el infinitivo.
before antes de after después de without sin
besides además de on al instead of en lugar de
in spite of a pesar de
Ejemplos:
1. I'm going to rest before eating. 2. After swimming we're going to rest.
Voy a descansar antes de comer. Después de nadar vamos a descansar.
3. He went out without saying good-bye to 4. Besides working in the office all day, I
me. have to help my husband in the evening.
Él salió sin despedirse de mí. Además de trabajar en la oficina todo el
día, tengo que ayudar a mi esposo en la
tarde.
5. On turning on the light, I saw that there 6. Instead of speak ing English, I'm going
was a mouse in my room. to speak Spanish.
Al prender la luz, vi que había un ratón en En lugar de estudiar inglés, voy a estudiar
mi cuarto. español.
7. In spite of be ing sick, he's going to the
office.
A pesar de estar enfermo, él va a ir a la
oficina.

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following phrases and practice reading them.
1. before working. 8. before going. 15. after buying.
2. after looking for. 9. without saying. 16. on thinking.
3. without going. 10. besides taking. off. 17. without picking out.
4. on speaking. 11. instead of spending. 18. in spite of winning.
5. besides playing. 12. after singing. 19. besides getting up.
6. instead of reading. 13. in spite of being. 20. instead of sleeping.
7. in spite of saying. 14. before doing.

EXERCISE 11. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. you shook hands with Mr. Cox.
2. They'll shake hands with my father.
3. He's shaken hands with all the boys.
4. She'd shake hands with them.
5. They shake hands with me.
6. We've been able to shake hands with all of them.
7. My father would be able to shake hands with my uncle.
8. The teachers are going to shake hands with me.
9. Henry wants to shake hands with you.
10. Mary had to shake hands with the president.

EXERCISE 12. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Was he going to shake hands with us?
2. Did they want to shake hands with the girls?
3. Would you like to shake hands with my wife?
4. Would they have to shake hands with the doctor?
5. Will you be able to shake hands with all those people?
6. Will you have to shake hands with the children? '
7. Did she shake hands with you?
8. Did Henry shake hands with my mother?
9. Do you always shake hands with your friends?
10. Have you shaken hands with me?
EXERCISE 13. Translate into Spanish.
1. Why did he say he wouldn't try hard to learn English?
2. It looks very dark outside.
3. He looks like a thief.
4. My raincoat wore out before the summer was over.
5. Before shaking hands with her father, I shook hands with her mother.
6. you can always make a living if you work hard.
7. I was about forty years old when I began to make a lot of money.
8. He makes a lot of money without working.
9. how long will the movie last?
10. Alberto, you're the luckiest man in the world.
11. What a joy that you have such good luck.
12. He knows that I'm right.
13. We had very good luck on our last trip.
14. Those boys are very foolish to get drunk.
15. That man was so fat that he could hardly walk.

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
save turn over use walk
stay translate visit want
talk try work watch
turn off travel wash worry (about)
turn on tie wait (for) ask

EXERCISE 15.
Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
sit sing take understand
sleep swim teach write
sell shake tell wake up
stand up shine think wear
set spend take off win

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

1. They build houses, don't they?
2. They don't build houses, do they?
3. Where do they build houses?
4. They built a factory, didn’t they?
5. They didn’t build a factory, did they?
6. Where did they build a factory?
7. They were building a factory, weren't they?
8. They weren't building a factory, were they?
9. Where were they building a factory?
10. They were going to build a house, weren't they?
11. They weren't going to build a house, were they?
12. Where were they going to build a house?
13. They'll build a store, won't they?
14. They won't build a store, will they?
15. Where will they build a store?
16. They've built an office building, haven't they?
17. They haven't built an office building, have they?
18. Where have they built an office building?
19. They'd built a school, hadn't they?
20. They hadn't built a school, had they?
21. Where had they built a school?
22. They'd build a movie theater, wouldn’t they?
23. They wouldn't build a movie theater, would they?
24. Where would they build a movie theater?
25. They'll be able to build downtown, won't they?
26. They won't be able to build downtown, will they?
27. Where will they be able to build downtown?
28. They've been able to build a house, haven't they?
29. They haven't been able to build a house, have they?
30. Where have they been able to build a house?
31. They'd been able to build a store, hadn’t they?
32. They hadn't been able to build a store, had they?
33. Where had they been able to build a store?
34. They'd be able to build a movie theater, wouldn't they?
35. They wouldn't be able to build a movie theater, would they?
36. Would they be able to build a movie theater?

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 16, using forms of the verbs mean, tie up, keep, fight, prefer, get
sick, get drunk, shake hands, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun
with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 18.
Read and translate.
THE DOG AND THE WOLF
The moon was very bright one night when a very poor wolf met a fat dog on the
road. “How is it that you're so fat and happy?" asked the wolf. “I can hardly find
enough food to eat.", "Why don't you work as I do," answered the dog, “so that you
can have three meals a day?", "I'd work, but I can't find a place to work," said the
wolf. "Come with me to my owner's house and help me watch for thieves at night,"
said the dog. “All right," said the wolf. “Since I live in the woods, I'm often hungry.
There's nothing like having a roof to sleep under and food all the time." While they
were walking along the road together, the wolf saw a mark on the dog's neck. "What
made that mark on your neck?" asked the wolf. “Oh, That's nothing," replied the dog.
“I think the chain that my owner puts around my neck is a little too tight." "Chain"
cried the wolf in surprise. "Do you mean that you aren't free to go where you want?"
"No, not exactly ," said the dog, “you see, my owner ties me up during the day, but
he lets me run free at night. I sleep during the day so that I can watch the house
better at night. My owner feeds me very well. He's always giving me food from the
kitchen. Wait. Where are you going?" As the wolf ran back into the forest, he said,
“you can keep your fine food and your chains. As for me, I prefer my freedom to
your fat."

EXERCISE 19. Write in English.

1. ¿Por qué no le darías la mano a él?
2. El teléfono está descompuesto, ¿verdad?
3. ¿Cuál vestido les gusta más, el rojo o el verde?
4. Los niños vinieron uno por uno al frente de la sala para darle la mano al
presidente.
5. ¿Para qué te vas a emborrachar el 16 de septiembre?
6. ¿Qué quiere decir esta palabra?
7. Apáguela. Ya no quiero leer más.
8. Iremos al cine juntos el domingo, ¿verdad?
9. Los muchachos americanos y las muchachas mexicanas están parados unos al
lado de las otras.
10. Qué lástima que tengas miedo de viajar en avión.
.
EXERCISE 20. Dictation
1. Those boys want to fight when they get drunk.
2. my watch chain is pure gold.
3. What are you keeping these old papers for?
4. That thief stole your bathing suit, didn’t he?
5. The boys and the girls were standing side by side in the living room.
6. He cut his finger while he was cutting the meat.
7. We'll be able to see the mountains from the roof, won't we?
8. The road to Puebla is less dangerous than the highway to Acapulco.
9. We picked out the least expensive bathing suit.
10. The stove won't work. It's out of order.

EXERCISE 21. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in
the negative.
1. Is the elevator out of order?
2. Does the elevator work?
3. Is the telephone out of order?
4. Does the telephone work?
5. Did you get sick?
6. Did you get sleepy?
7. Did you get ready?
8. Did you get married last year?
9. Did you get drunk on Saturday night?
10. Did you get mad at your wife?
11. Did you get rich in the United States?
12. Did you get wet this afternoon?
13. Did you get your hair wet this afternoon?
14. Did you get up early?
15. Did you get there on time?
16. Did you give up?
17. Is it less dangerous to travel by train than by plane?
18. Is the moon less bright than the sun?
19. Are you shorter than your brother?
20. Are you taller than your cousin?
Answer the following questions.
21. What’s the table made of?
22. What are you building a house for?
23. What did you build a house for?
24. What color is your sweater?
25. What color is your bathing suit?

LESSON 9.
VOCABULARY.
1. to ride, rode, Montar. 15. donkey Burro.
ridden
2. to drown, drowned, Ahogar. 16. fish Pez.
drowned
3. to grow, grew, Crecer. 17. fool Tonto.
grown
4. to drive, drove, Conducir. 18. respect Respeto.
driven
5. to remember, Recordar. 19. age Edad.
remembered,
remembered
6. to turn, turned, Girar. 20. edge borde
turned
7. brown Café. 21. pole Poste
8. yellow Amarillo. 22. bridge Puente
9. pink Rosa. 23. shoulder hombro
10. ashamed Avergonzado. 24. business negocio
11. funny Divertido. 25. pupil alumno
12. crazy Loco. 26. student estudiante
13. sweet Dulce. 27. alone solo
14. sour Agrio.

IDIOMS.
1. to have just acabar de Do you remember ¿me recuerdas?
me?
I've just eaten. Acabo de comer 5. Aren't you ¿No estás
ashamed? avergonzado?
I'd just eaten. Acababa de comer. 6. Turn around Date vuelta
2. to get scared asustar 7. more or less más o menos
3. to get on subir 8. It's none of your No es asunto tuyo.
business.
4. I don't No recuerdo.
remember.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. before fighting
2. after fighting
3. besides fighting
4. instead of fighting
5. in spite of fighting
6. Let them fight.
7. Don't let them fight.
8. Let's fight.
9. He's had to travel a lot this year.
10. He hasn't had to travel a lot this year.
11. He'd had to travel all the time.
12. He hadn't had to travel all the time.
13. You'd be sleepy in the morning.
14. you wouldn't be sleepy in the morning.
15. It'd be cold in January.
16. It wouldn’t be cold in January.
17. It'd be hot in Acapulco.
18. It wouldn't be hot in Acapulco.
19. Would they have to spend the money?
20. Wouldn't they have to spend the money?

AUXILIARES DE OBLIGACIÓN SHOULD, OUGHT TO, MUST

Se expresa obligación usando los auxiliares should , ought to y must seguidos del
infinitivo sin la partícula to. Should y ought to significan la misma cosa, pero must
es más fuerte, puesto que éste indica necesidad absoluta y los otros dos auxiliares
no. Should y ought to equivalen a debería. Must equivale a tener que. Se usan
todos estos auxiliares en afirmativo; pero generalmente, se usa should en negativo
e interrogativo en vez de ought to. La contracción de should not es shouldn't.
Tanto must como have to equivalen a tener que , pero para negar e interrogar se
usa have to, y no must. Ejemplos:
Afirmativo, Negativo.
I should speak Yo Deberia hablar I shouldn't speak Yo no Deberia
English. inglés. English. hablar inglés.
he ought to speak Él Deberia hablar he shouldn't Él no Deberia
English. inglés. speak English. hablar inglés.
they must speak Ellos tienen que they don’t have to Ellos no tienen
English. hablar inglés. speak English. que hablar inglés.

Interrogativo Interrogativo Negativo.

Auxiliar, sustantivo pronombre, verbo.
should I speak ¿debería yo hablar shouldn't I speak ¿no debería yo
English? inglés? English? hablar inglés?
should he speak ¿debería él hablar shouldn't he ¿no debería él
English? inglés? speak English? hablar inglés?
do they have to ¿tienen ellos que don't they have to ¿no tienen ellos
speak English? hablar inglés? speak English? que hablar inglés?

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. He should keep his books.
2. He shouldn't keep his books.
3. Should he keep his books?
4. Shouldn't he keep his books?
5. how many books should he keep?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 2, using forms of the verbs build, knock, hide, dig, fight, lend, pay,
rest, save, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use
the interrogative wordswhen it is possible.

SHOULD HAVE + PA RTICIPIO

El uso de should have más un participio en inglés equivale en español a debió
más un infinitivo; o debió ( debería) más un participio; o hubiera más un
participio. La contracción negativa es shouldn't have. Ejemplo: You should have
eaten earlier. Deberías haber comido temprano.
EXERCISE 4.
Verb Practice
1. She should have gone to the party.
2. She shouldn’t have gone to the party.
3. Should she have gone to the party?
4. Shouldn't she have gone to the party?
5. When should she have gone to the party?

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

Repeat Exercise 4., using past participles of the verbs eat, come, fill, escape, cut,
break, become, cover, hide, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun
with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

MUST PARA EXPRESAR PROBABILIDAD

Se expresa probabilidad en el presente con el auxiliar must, más el infinitivo sin la
partícula to.
must be. Debe ser, estar.
Para expresar probabilidad en el negativo se emplea la palabra probably (que sigue
al sujeto) con el verbo en negativo.
1. It must be very hot in Acapulco. 1. Debe hacer mucho calor en
Acapulco.
2. He probably isn't the English teacher. 2. Probablemente él no es el profesor de
inglés.
3. She must be about thirty years old 3. Ella debe tener unos treinta años
now. ahora.
4. They probably aren't hungry. 4. Probablemente no tengan hambre
ellos.
5. He must eat a lot. He's very fat. 5. Él Debe comer mucho. Él está muy
gordo.
6. He probably doesn't eat a lot. He's very thin. 6. Él Probablemente no come mucho. Él está muy
delgado.

MUST HAVE + PARTICIPIO

Se expresa probabilidad en el pasado con los auxiliares must have, más un
participio.
must have been. Debe haber sido, estado.
Para expresar probabilidad en el negativo se emplea la palabra probably (que sigue
al sujeto) con el tiempo pasado (no antepresente) del verbo empleado.
I probably wasn't. Yo probablemente no fui, era.
he probably wasn't. Él probablemente no fue, era.
they probably weren't. Ellos probablemente no fueron, eran.
it probably wasn't. Probablemente no fue, era.
1. It must have been very hot in 1. Debe haber hecho mucho calor en
Acapulco. Acapulco.
It probably wasn't very hot in Acapulco. Probablemente no hizo mucho calor en
Acapulco.
2. He must have been very rich. 2. Él Debe haber sido muy rico.
He probably wasn't very rich. Él Probablemente no era muy rico.
3. He must have eaten a lot. He got 3. Él Debe haber comido mucho. Él se
sick. enfermó.
He probably didn't eat a lot. He's still É l Proba bl eme nte no c o m i ó m u c h o . É l t o d a v í a
tiene hambre.
hungry.

EXERCISE 6. Verb Practice.

1. He must be very hungry.
2. He probably isn't very hungry.
3. He must have been very hungry.
4. He probably wasn't very hungry.

EXERCISE 7. Verb Practice.

Repeat Exercise 6, using forms of the verbs be thirsty, be cold, be warm, be hot, be
sleepy, be afraid, be cold, be warm, be hot, be a doctor, have money, eat a lot, work
hard, speak English, get up early, work late. Use a different noun or pronoun with
each verb when possible.

EXERCISE 8. Verb Practice.

1. He should drive tomorrow, shouldn't he?
2. He shouldn't drive tomorrow, should he?
3. Should he drive tomorrow?
4. Shouldn't he drive tomorrow?
5. Why shouldn’t he drive tomorrow?
6. He should have driven yesterday, shouldn't he?
7. He shouldn't have driven yesterday, should he?
8. Should he have driven yesterday?
9. Shouldn’t he have driven yesterday?
10. Why shouldn't he have driven yesterday?
11. He must drive every day.
12. He probably doesn't drive every day.
13. He must have driven every day.
14. He probably didn't drive every day.
15. The children should be hungry, shouldn’t they?
16. The children shouldn’t be hungry, should they?
17. Should the children be hungry?
18. Shouldn't the children be hungry?
19. Why should the children be hungry?
20. The children should have been hungry, shouldn’t they?
21. The children shouldn’t have been hungry, should they?
22. Should the children have been hungry?
23. Shouldn't the children have been hungry?
24. Why should the children have been hungry?
25. The children must be hungry.
26. The children probably aren't hungry.
27. The children must have been hungry.
28. The children probably weren't hungry.
29. There must be a bridge here.
30. There probably isn't a bridge here.
31. There must have been a bridge here.
32. There probably wasn't a bridge here.

EXERCISE 9. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following

adjectives and adverbs (increasing and decreasing scale).
angry beautiful comfortable dirty
big black complete difficult
blue bright correct dangerous
bad clean carefully dark
busy cold cheap early

EXERCISE 10. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as
required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(young) 1. Are you than your cousin?
(wide) 2. What is the river in Mexico?
(weak) 3. Women are than men.
(white) 4. Her dress is than mine.
(useful).5. This is the book I have.
(warm) 6. It's today than it was yesterday.
(warm) 7. Is this the coat you could find?
(comfortable) 8. It's to travel by plane than by bus.
(lazy) 9. My neighbor is the man in the world.
(foolish) 10. I think they're than we.

EXERCISE 11. FiIl the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as
required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (decreasing scale).
(sharp) 1. My knife is the of all the knives.
(heavy) 2. His raincoat is than his overcoat.
(hungry) 3. She is now than she was an hour ago.
(full) 4. Of all the boxes that one is the .
(difficult) 5. The second book is than the others.
(cheap) 6. Food is now than it was last year.
(dangerous) 7. Which of the two road is ?
(expensive) 8. Wy did you buy the nuts?
(good) 9. This cake is the .

EXERCISE 12. Change these sentences to the past, future, present perfect, past
perfect, and conditional. Translate each time.
1. He can see you every day.
2. They can go back by car.
3. We can get ready in an hour.
4. She can finish on time.
5. you can wash the glasses without breaking them.
6. John can speak before going to bed.
7. That man can carry two buckets of water.
8. In spite of being sick, you can do a little work.
9. They can hide the money in that box under the bed.
10. Your sister can dance very well.

EXERCISE 13. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the interrogative
and interrogative negative.
1. He's just eaten.
2. They'd just gone.
3. She's just finished the work.
4. She's just closed the store.
5. You've just begun.
6. I've just cleaned the house.
7.The teacher has just read that book.
8. The girls have just set the table.
9. I'd just made a cake.
10. They had just heard the news.

EXERCISE 14. Answer the following questions in the affirmative.

1. Have you just come from the movies?
2. Had she just answered the question?
3. Have they just spoken to you?
4. Had we just broken the window?
5. Has he just caught a fish?
6. Have you just drunk the milk?
7. Had they just danced?
8. Has she just fed the chickens?
9. Have the boys just looked at the picture?
10. Have the men just put their coats on?

EXERCISE 15. Translate into Spanish.

1. We tried hard to understand them.
2. That house looks like the place where I was born.
3. She's crying. She must have fallen down.
4. I didn't shake hands with him because my hands were dirty.
5. When this suit wears out, I’ll be able to buy a new one.
6. If you can't make a living when you're twenty years old, you'll never be able to
make a living.
7. It must be cold outside. Everybody is wearing a coat.
8. When I sold newspapers, I made ten dollars a week, more or less.
9. If that man turns around, I can tell you if he's our neighbor.
10. We've just visited our cousins in the United States.
11. We got so scared when we saw the dogs that we started to run.
12. There weren't any seats left when I got on the bus.
13. Aren't you ashamed to eat that little girl's apple?
14. Shouldn't we have got to Monterrey by eight o'clock?
15. It's none of your business what I do.

EXERCISE 16. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
answer complete carry disappear
arrive (in, at) change call dance
believe correct cover die
clean clap dictate drown
close cry dress drop

EXERCISE 17. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
wear out become come back dig
be break cut eat
bring blow catch feel
buy build do find
begin come drink forget

EXERCISE 18. Verb Practice.

1. Those men ride in the park on Sunday, don't they?
2. Those men don't ride in the park on Sunday, do they?
3. Those men rode in the park on Sunday, didn't they?
4. Those men didn't ride in the park on Sunday, did they?
5. Those men are going to ride in the park on Sunday, aren’t they?
6. Those men aren't going to ride in the park on Sunday, are they?
7. Those men will ride in the park on Sunday, won’t they?
8. Those men won’t ride in the park on Sunday, will they?
9. Those men like to ride on Saturday afternoon, don’t they?
10. Those men don't like to ride on Saturday afternoon, do they?
11. Those men want to ride on Saturday afternoon, don't they?
12. Those men don't want to ride on Saturday afternoon, do they?
13. Those men have to ride on Saturday afternoon, don't they?
14. Those men don't have to ride on Saturday afternoon, do they?
15. Those men had to ride on Saturday afternoon, didn't they?
16. Those men didn’t have to ride on Saturday afternoon, did they?
17. Those men could ride very well, couldn't they?
18. Those men couldn't ride very well, could they?
19. Those men have ridden every day this week, haven’t they?
20. Those men haven't ridden every day this week, have they?
21. Those men had ridden every day this week, hadn’t they?
22. Those men hadn't ridden every day this week, had they?
23. Those men would ride on the first of the month, wouldn't they?
24. Those men wouldn't ride on the first of the month, would they?
.25. Those men should ride on the 16th of September, shouldn't they?
26. Those men shouldn't ride on the 16th of September, should they?
27. Those men will be able to ride tomorrow, won't they?
28. Those men won't be able to ride tomorrow, will they?
29. Those men have been able to ride every day, haven't they?
30. Those men haven't been able to ride every day, have they?
31. Those men had been able to ride in the park, hadn't they?
32. Those men hadn't been able to ride in the park, had they?
33. Those men would be able to ride all day, wouldn't they?
34. Those men wouldn't be able to ride all day, would they?

EXERCISE 19. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 19, using forms of the verbs remember, turn, drive, drown, grow,
get on, get scared, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 20. Read and translate.

THE FARMER, HIS SON, AND THEIR DONKEY.
Once there was a farmer who had a donkey that was too old to work anymore. "Let's
drive the donkey to the market and sell him," said the father to his son, "and take
the money and buy a younger donkey that will be able to help us in the field." So,
the farmer and his son started to the market with the donkey walking in front of
them. On the way they met some girls walking along the road. "Look at those fools,"
said the girls laughing. "They're both walking, and the donkey isn’t carrying
anything. They ought to ride the donkey." "They're right," said the old man to his
son. "One of us should ride. Get on the donkey, and I’ll walk behind.” Later they met
some old men who were standing beside the road talking. "Look at that," said one
old man to the others. "That's just exactly what I was telling you. No one has any
respect for old age these days. Look at that lazy, young boy riding the donkey while
his poor old father has to walk. Get off the donkey and let your father ride." "Those
old men are right," said the father to the boy, "Get off the donkey and let me ride."
So the father got on the donkey, and they started down the road again. After a while
they saw some women washing clothes near the road.
"You must be crazy," said one of the women to the farmer, "to ride the donkey and
let that poor little boy walk. you should let him ride too."; "I believe you're right,"
answered the farmer. "The boy ought to ride too". The farmer put the boy on the
donkey behind him, and they rode on toward the city. Just as they reached the edge
of town, a man who lived there said to them, "You two big, strong men should be
ashamed to ride that poor little donkey. Two young men like you should be able to
carry the donkey." "I think he's right," said the father. "We must carry the donkey for
a while." The farmer and his son got off the donkey and tied the donkey's legs
together. Then they tied the donkey's legs to a pole, put the pole across their
shoulders and carried the donkey over the bridge. They looked so funny that the
people came out of their houses to laugh at them. The poor donkey got scared of all
the noise and began to try to get away. In the excitement the animal jumped off the
bridge into the water and drowned. Try to please (complacer) everybody, and you
please nobody, not even yourself.

EXERCISE 21. Write in English.

1. Cuando nos despertamos, estaba el suelo cubierto de nieve.
2. Has crecido mucho desde el año pasado, ¿verdad?
3. Deberías recordar todos los nombres de los niños.
4. De noche, cuando estoy solo en la casa me asusto.
5. Cuando ustedes se estaban bajando del camión, nosotros subimos.
6. ¿Va a dar vuelta el camión en la próxima esquina?
7. En vez de voltearse, ella se quedó con la cara hacia la pared.
8. Han de ser las seis de la mañana.
9. Ellos han de haberse divertido mucho porque no regresaron hasta las dos de la
mañana.
10. ¿Trajiste las manzanas más dulces que pudiste encontrar?

EXERCISE 22. Dictation.

1. my business is doing very well this year.
2. Would you like to see the fish I caught last Sunday?
3. He'd be able to make a living if he worked hard.
4. You'll never learn English without speaking.
5. No one knows the age of that tree.
6. They think we're completely crazy, don't they?
7. That's the funniest movie I ever saw.
8. my flowers haven't grown very much because it's been so cold.
9. He said that I'd have to work on Saturday and Sunday.
10. I knew it'd be cold in Chicago in December.

EXERCISE 23. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. how long did the meeting last?
2. how long did the class last?
3. how long did the movie last?
4. When was the meeting over?
5. When was the movie over?
6. When was the class over?
7. What time did you get up?
8. What time did you get there?
9. What time did you wake up?
10. What time did you get ready?
11. What did you get off the bus for?
12. What did you get on the bus for?
13. Where are you from?
14. Where did you come from?
15. What state did you come from?
16. What city did you come from?
17. Who did you come with?
18. Who did you go with?
19. Where were you born?
20. When were you born?
21. What's the movie about?
22. What's the book about?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
23. Do you still live in the same place?
24. Do you still teach English?
25. Do you still like to dance?
26. Do you still like to go to the movies?
27. Do you still like to travel?
28. Have they already come?
29. Have they already gone?
30. Are they already here?

LESSON 10.
VOCABULARY.
1. to decide, decided, Decidir 14. several varios
decided
2. to hu nt , hu nt e d, cazar 15. chance oportunidad
hu nt ed
3. t o no t ice, no t ice d , Notar opportunity oportunidad,
no t iced
4. to send, sent, enviar 16. slave esclavo
sent
5. to bleed, bled, sangrar 17. master Maestro, amo
bled
6 . t o c a p t u r e , c a p t u r e d , capturar 18. king rey
captured
7. also también 19. soldier soldado
8. grateful agradecido 20. toe dedo
9. sore adolorido, 21. thorn espina; púa
10. cruel cruel 22. story cuento
11. fresh fresco 23. shelter albergue
12. unhappy infeliz 24. weather clima
13. whole entero. 25. season estación

IDIOMS.
1. how long does it take? ¿Cuánto tiempo tarda?
How long will it take me (you, him, etc)? ¿Cuánto tiempo tardaré (ás, á, etc)?
2. It takes a long time. Tarda mucho.
It took a long time. Tardó mucho.
It'll take me (you, him, etc) a long time. Tardaré (ás, á, etc) mucho.
3. It takes about two hours. Tarda como dos horas.
It took about a year. Tardó como un año.
It'll take me (you, him, etc.) about three Tardaré (ás, á, etc como tres días.
days.
4. It doesn’t take long. No tarda mucho.
It didn't take long. No tardó mucho.
It won't take me (you, him, etc.) long. No me tardaré (ás, á, etc. ) mucho.
5. Does it take long? ¿Tarda mucho?
Did it take long? ¿Tardó mucho?
will it take me (you, him, etc.) long? ¿Tardaré (ás, á, etc.) mucho?
6. to get better mejorarse
7. to get worse empeorarse
8. at first al principio
9. I have a bad cold. Tengo un fuerte catarro.
I have a bad headache. Tengo un fuerte dolor de cabeza.
I have a bad toothache. Tengo un fuerte dolor de muelas.
I have a bad earache. Tengo un fuerte dolor de oído.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. without turning around
2. besides turning around
3. instead of turning around
4. in spite of turning around
5. on turning around
6. Let her turn around.
7. Don't let her turn around.
8. We should ride during the day.
9. We shouldn't ride during the day.
10. Should we ride during the day?
11. Shouldn’t we ride during the day?
12. We would be able to ride those horses.
13. Would we be able to ride those horses?
14. He would have to drive the car.
15. He wouldn’t have to drive the car.
16. Would he have to drive the car?
17. There'd be a plane here.
18. There wouldn't be a plane there.
19. They'd be hungry all morning.

SUPPLEMENTARYVOCABULARY
1. birth nacimiento 20. fight pelea,
2. belief creencia 21. fighter
3. blood sangre 22. marriage matrimonio
4. bloody sangriento 23. growth crecimiento
5. cover cubierta 24. hunter cazador
6. capture captura 25. kiss beso
7. captive cautivo 26. loan préstamo
8. disappearance desaparición 27. meaning significado
9. dance baile bailarín 28. pay
10. dancer bailarín 29. pay day día de pago
11. death muerte 30. payment pago
12, dead (ad) muerto 31. preference preferencia
13. dying (ad) moribundo 32. snow nieve
14. decision decisión 33. shout grito
15. decisive decisivo 34. savings ahorros
16. driver chofer 35. rider jinete
17. Flier aviador 36. traveler viajero
18. flight vuelo 37. traveling (ad.) viajero
19. flying volador

EXERCISE 2. Translate into Spanish.

1. The baby died at birth.
2. It was a bloody fight.
3. They found blood on the seat covers of the car.
4. Did you go to the dance last night?
5. Mexicans are good dancers.
6. I think the driver was drunk.
7. Are you afraid of death?
8. Have they reached a decision yet?
9. Do you think their marriage will last?
10. The growth of trees is very slow.
11. I'm going to ask my brother for a loan.
12. Why do hunters wear red hats?
13. Do you know the meaning of this word?
14. you can pick up your money on pay day.
15. Who heard the shout on the 15th of September?
16. Where do you keep your savings?
17. My sister is a good rider.
18. I asked the bus driver for my change.
19. We have to make a payment on the stove every month.
20. Do you know anything about the disappearance of the money?
EXERCISE 3. Give the comparative and superlative degree of the following
adjectives and adverbs (increasing and decreasing scale).
early green free
easy good hot
empty happy hard
expensive hungry heavy
exact fine important
fast full impossible
funny foolish fat
EXERCISE 4. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as
required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (increasing scale).
(far) 1. We can swim than they.
(funny) 2. This is the story I've ever read.
(good) 3. The movie we saw today is than the one we saw yesterday.
(hungry) 4. This dog is always the .
(expensive) 5. Why did you buy the suit?
(fat) 6. We'll eat the chicken.
(important) 7. The lessons are the last ones.
(free) 8. I'm than a bird.
(fast) 9. He can run than you.
(dangerous) 10. Football is than basketball.
EXERCISE 5. Fill the blanks with the comparative or superlative degree, as
required, of the adjective or adverb indicated and translate (decreasing scale).
(noisy) 1. This class is the of all the classes.
(polite) 2. My husband is now than when we got married.
(expensive) 3. Bread is than cake.
(softly) 4. She speaks the of all the girls.
(sour) 5. These apples are than those you bought yesterday.
(sweet) 6. I want the fruit that's the.
(sad) 7. She'd feel if she went out more.
(safe) 8. I feel in a plane than in a train.
(tired) 9. If you didn't work today, you should be the .
(wide) 10. This street is the of all the streets in the city.

EXERCISE 6. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. There should be a phone in the office.
2. There shouldn't be a phone in the office.
3. Should there be a phone in the office?
4. Shouldn't there be a phone in the office?
5. how many phones should there be in the office?
6. There should be a light above this table.
7. There shouldn't be a light above this table.
8. Should there be a light above this table?
9. Shouldn't there be a light above this table?
10. how many lights should there be above this table?
11. The children should be hungry before twelve o'clock.
12. The children shouldn't be hungry before twelve o'clock.
13. The children should be sleepy by six o'clock.
14. The children shouldn't be sleepy by six o'clock.
15. The children should be tired now.
16. The children shouldn't be tired now.
17. They should have worked every day.
18. They shouldn't have worked every day.
19. Should they have worked every day?
20. Shouldn't they have worked every day?
EXERCISE 7. Answer the following questions, using It takes about. Ejemplo:
how long does it take to learn English? It takes about three years to learn it.
¿Cuánto tiempo tarda en aprender Tarda como tres años aprenderlo.
inglés?
1. how long does it take to go to Acapulco by car?
2. how long does it take to go to Veracruz by train?
3. how long does it take to go to Acapulco by plane?
4. how long does it take you to go to Acapulco by bus?
5. how long does it take him to go to New York by ship?
Answer the following questions, using It'll take about
6. how long Will it take to make a cake?
7. how long Will it take to make a dress?
8. how long Will it take to make a thousand dollars?
9. how long Will it take her to dress?
10. how long Will it take them to finish the book?
Answer the following questions, using It took about
11. how long did it take to learn how to swim?
12. how long did it take to learn how to drive?
13. how long did it take to fix the radio?
14. how long did it take you to write the letter?
15. how long did it take us to go downtown?
EXERCISE 8. Answer the following questions, using It takes a long time. Ejemplo:
how long does it take to learn English? It takes a long time to learn it.
1. how long does it take to walk up to the hotel?
2. how long does it take to get to Chicago?
3 how long does it take to build a house?
4. how long does it take Mary to translate the lesson?
5. how long does it take the boys to walk to school?
Answer the following questions, using It’ll take a long time
6. how long will it take to answer all the questions?
7. how long will it take Henry to become a doctor?
8. how long will it take to get rich?
9. how long will it take your wife to get ready?
10. how long will it take to open all the boxes?
Answer the following questions, using It took a long time
11. how long did it take to pick up all the papers?
12. how long did it take to pronounce all the words?
13. how long did it take to pay the workers?
14. how long did it take the Amens to sell their house?
15. how long did it take them to save $100.00 (dollars)?

EXERCISE 9. Answer the following questions, using It doesn’t take long. Ejemplo:
how long does it take to learn English? It doesn’t take long to learn it.
1. how long does it take to set the table?
2. how long does it take her to sing that song?
3. how long does it take to swim across the river?
4. how long does it take your husband to spend $500.00 (dollars)?
5. how long does it take to teach them how to speak English?
Answer the following questions, using It won't take long
6. how long will it take to turn off the water?
7. how long will it take to turn on the television?
8 how long will it take you to take off your coat?
9. how long will it take him to put on his shoes?
10. how long will it take them to clean the house?
Answer the following questions, using It didn't take long
11. how long did it take her to wash the clothes?
12. how long did it take you to wear out your shoes?
13. how long did it take to close the store?
14. how long did it take the children to eat dinner?
15. how long did it take to correct the sentences?

EXERCISE 10. Translate into Spanish.

1. Is your record player out of order?
2. I tried hard to translate the lesson before class.
3. He couldn't shake hands with me because his right hand was sore.
4. He told me it wouldn't take long to learn English, but it takes a long time.
5. Your raincoat won't wear out so soon if you're careful with it.
6. Why were you afraid to tell him that you were right?
7. I'd just got to the store when they opened the door.
8. We had such a good time in Dallas that I'd like to go back again.
9. At first it was raining so hard that we couldn't see anything.
10. They thought he was getting better, but he got worse and died.
11. you shouldn’t have said such a thing to your mother.
12. They should have cleaned the whole house in an hour.
13. Since Mr. Fletcher didn't have to work last Saturday, I think he should work this
Saturday.
14. They must have gone back several days ago.
15. I knocked on the door and on the window, but nobody answered. Had you just
gone out?

EXERCISE 11. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
escape help kill look (at)
form hurry kiss look for
fill hunt knock (on) laugh (at)
fix invite live listen (to)
finish jump like love

EXERCISE 12. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
fly go back get up get rich
fall (down) go out get mad (at) get married
feed go to bed get sleepy get away
fight go to sleep get thirsty get off
go get get to (here, there) get old

EXERCISE 13. Verb Practice

1. They decide quickly.
2. They don’t decide quickly.
3. Do they decide quickly?
4. Don't they decide quickly?
5. Why don't they decide quickly?
6. They decided yesterday.
7. They didn't decide yesterday.
8. Did they decide yesterday?
9. Didn't they decide yesterday?
10. Why didn't they decide yesterday?
11. They're deciding now.
12. They aren't deciding now.
13. Are they deciding now?
14. Aren't they deciding now?
15. Why aren't they deciding now?
16. They'd decide after dinner.
17. They wouldn't decide after dinner.
18. Would they decide after dinner?
19. Wouldn't they decide after dinner?
20. Why wouldn't they decide after dinner?
21. They should decide soon.
22. They shouldn't decide soon.
23. Should they decide soon?
24. Shouldn't they decide soon?
25. Why shouldn't they decide soon?
26. They'd be able to decide in an hour.
27. They wouldn't be able to decide in an hour.
28. Would they be able to decide in an hour?
29. Wouldn't they be able to decide in an hour?
30. Why wouldn't they be able to decide in an hour?
31. They’ll be able to decide next week.
32. They won't be able to decide next week.
33. Will they be able to decide next week?
34. Won't they be able to decide next Week?
35. Why won't they be able to decide next week?

EXERCISE 14. Verb Practice.

Repeat Exercise 13, using forms of the verbs bleed, capture, send, hunt, notice, get
better, get worse, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each
verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 15. Read and translate.

ANDROCLES AND THE LION
A long time ago in Rome there lived a slave called Androcles, who had a very cruel
master. Androcles was very unhappy with his life as a slave, and he often thought of
freedom outside the city. One day he decided to run away; so, when the opportunity
came, he escaped to the forest and lived there. Life in the forest was very hard for
Androcles because he had to hunt for his food like the animals. Also, he was always
afraid that his master would find him and take him back to Rome. One day when
Androcles went out to look for food, he met a huge lion. At first, he was very scared
because he was sure that the lion would eat him. Then Androcles noticed that the
lion's paw was sore and bleeding and that there was a big thorn in one of his toes.
Androcles took the thorn out of the lion's foot, and said to him, "Your foot Will get
better now. In a few days you’ll be able to walk again." The lion was so grateful to
Androcles for what he had done that he took the slave to his cave and let him hide
there. Androcles had shelter from the rain and cold wind, and every day the lion
brought him fresh meat to eat. " Everything was all right until the king sent soldiers
into the forest to look for lions for the arena in Rome. The soldiers captured both
Androcles and the lion and took them back to Rome. They were going to feed
Androcles to a lion that hadn't eaten anything for several days. The king came to the
arena to watch the fun. Then the soldiers put the slave and the lion in the arena in
front of the king's seat; but as soon as the lion came near Androcles, he knew he
had found his old friend. To the surprise of everyone, the hungry lion lay down at
Androcles' feet. The king asked Androcles why the lion wouldn't eat him; and after
Androcles had told him the whole story, the king gave the slave his freedom and let
the lion return to the forest.
EXERCISE 16. Write in English.
1. ¿Por qué toca Ud. a la ventana en vez de tocar a la puerta?
2. Me corté el dedo y sangró.
3. Estas son las manzanas más agrias que jamás haya comido.
4. Debiste hacer tu tarea en vez de ir al cine.
5. Además de capturar dos leones, también capturaron algunos pájaros hermosos.
6. ¿Se fijaron Uds. que María tiene un vestido nuevo?
7. Hace cien años nunca hacía frío en México.
8. Él tenía un fuerte dolor de cabeza después de tomar tanto en (at) la fiesta
anoche.
9. No puede venir mi esposa porque tiene catarro.
10. ¿Cuánto tiempo se tarda en llegar a Nueva York en avión?

EXERCISE 17. Dictation.

1. Did you ever have an earache?
2. The weather has been very bad for two weeks.
3. What season of the year do you like best?
4. Are you sure that these eggs are fresh?
5. We've decided to take the stove out of the kitchen.
6. I’ll bring you some nice flowers if I go out of town this weekend.
7. Who is your favorite movie star?
8. What do you do when you have a bad headache?
9. If you drink that dirty water, it'll make you sick.
10. We should have finished all the letters before going to bed.

EXERCISE 18. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. Where were you yesterday?
2. how many books did they bring?
3. When did he become a doctor?
4. how many glasses did you break?
5. When did he get married?
6. Where did you build your house?
7. Why did they come back?
8. how many fish did you catch?
9. Did you do the homework?
10. how much milk did she drink?
11. When did he die?
12. Why did you drive your car to Mexico?
13. how many pieces of bread did you eat?
14. Should he have studied?
15. Should I have given it to her?
16. Shouldn't they have done it?
17. Where did they fall down?
18. Who did you go to the movies with?
19. What time did you get up?
20. how much money did you give them?
21. When did we go back?
22. Who got sick?
23. Why did you get mad?
24. When did he go to sleep?
25. What time did you get there?

LESSON 11.
VOCABULARY.
1. to smile, smiled, Sonreír. Truth Verdad
smiled
2. to add, added, Sumar, añadir 14. camel camello
added
3. to agree, Acordar. 15. pig cerdo
agreed, agreed
4. to find oud, Averiguar. Hog cerdo
found out, found Descubrir. Enterar.
out.
5. to push, pushed, Empujar. 16. job empleo
pushed.
6. To pull, pulled, Jalar. 17. hump Joroba.
pulled.
7. however Sin embargo. 18. body Cuerpo.
Nevertheless Sin embargo. 19. gate Puerta.
8. easily Fácilmente. 20. peach Durazno.
9. inside Adentro. 21. orange Naranja.
10. rainy Lluvioso. 22. side. Lado.
11. high alto 23. game Juego.
12. low Bajo 24. present Regalo, presente.
13. true Verdadero 25. advantage. Ventaja.

IDIOMS.
1. Used + (infinitive) acostumbraba + (infinitivo)
He used to get up early. Acostumbraba levantarse temprano.
2. to get in Subir. Meter.
He got in the car. Él se subió al coche.
The thief got in through the window. El ladrón se metió por la ventana.
3. to get out Bajar. Salir.
He got out of the car. Se bajó del coche.
The door was closed and I couldn’t get La puerta estaba cerrada y no pude
out. salir.
4. to give up Renunciar.
5. You're wrong. Estas equivocado.
6. Don't push. No empujes.
7. every other day cada tercer día
8. He just left. Acaba de salir.
9. It's true. Es verdad.
It's the truth. Es la verdad.
10. I found out about the party. Averigüé lo de la fiesta.
I found out about it. Lo averigüé.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. Let them decide.
2. Let's decide now.
3. before capturing
4. after capturing
5. without capturing
6. on capturing
7. instead of capturing
8. in spite of capturing
9. There should be flowers in the market now.
10. There shouldn't be snow on the mountains in June.
11. There should be music at the party.
12. They'll be able to hide the money in the office,
13. Will they be able to hide the money in the office?
14. Won't they be able to hide the money in the office?
15. What are they going to get married for?
16. What are they getting married for?
17. What did they get married for?
18. What are they going to play with?
19. What are they playing with?
20. What did they play with?

THE PASSIVE VOICE. LA VOZ PASIVA

La voz pasiva se forma usando la forma del verbo be como auxiliar junto con el
participio del verbo empleado. Conjugando el auxiliar (formas del verbo be) se
forman diferentes tiempos de la voz pasiva. Se puede traducir la voz pasiva al
español literalmente, sin embargo la traducción con la forma se es más común.
1. Many plans are made. (present passive)
Se hacen muchos planes. (Muchos planes son hechos.)
2. Many plans were made. (past passive)
Se hicieron muchos planes. (Muchos planes fueron hechos.)
3. Many plans will be made. (future passive)
Se harán muchos planes. (Muchos planes serán hechos.)
4. Many plans have been made. (present perfect passive)
Se han hecho muchos planes. (Muchos planes han sido hechos.)
5. Many plans had been made. (past perfect passive)
Se habían hecho muchos planes. (Muchos planes habian sido hechos.)
6. Many plans would be made. (conditional passive)
Se harían muchos planes. (Muchos planes serían hechos.)
7. Many plans should be made. (obligation passive)
Se deberían hacer muchos planes. (Muchos planes deberían ser hechos.)
8. Many plans are being made. (present progressive passive)
Se están haciendo muchos planes. (Muchos planes están siendo hechos.)
9. Many plans were being made. (past progressive passive)
Se estaban haciendo muchos planes. (Muchos planes estaban siendo hechos.)
10. Many plans can be made. (present passive with can)
Se pueden hacer muchos planes. (Muchos planes pueden ser hechos.)
11. Many plans could be made. (past passive with can)
Se pudieron hacer muchos planes. (Muchos planes pudieron ser hechos.)

EXERCISE 3.
The following sentences are in the present passive voice. Change them to past
passive, future passive, present perfect passive, past perfect passive, and
conditional passive. Translate each time, using the se form in Spanish.
1. AII the questions are answered in English.
2. The lesson is translated into Spanish.
3. Those things are done in the kitchen.
4. The work is finished by noon.
5. Ten lions are captured every month.
6. That window is closed every evening.
7. Many houses are built of stone.
8. The news is known by everyone.
9. The presents are hidden from the children:
10. Spanish is spoken in Mexico.

EXERCISE 4.
The following sentences are in the present passive. Change them to the present
progressive passive, past progressive passive, present passive with can, past
passive with can, and obligation passive. Translate each time, using the se form in
Spanish.
1. Those children are dressed in white.
2. The radio is fixed every week.
3. All the sentences are dictated in Spanish.
4. All the sentences are corrected in class.
5. The money is kept in that box.
6. Some of the animals are fed at noon.
7. Your friend is invited to parties every week.
8. The coats are hung in the closet.
9. The bucket is filled with water.
10. Games are played every Sunday.

USED + INFINITIVO
La palabra used, seguida de un infinitivo con la partícula to, se emplea
generalmente para expresar acción habitual en el pasado. Used + (infinitive)
equivale a acostumbraba + (infinitivo) y al copretérito en castellano cuando éste
indica costumbre en el pasado. Ejemplos:
He used to sing.
Él acostumbraba cantar o Él cantaba.
He didn't use to sing.
Él no acostumbraba cantar o Él no cantaba.
Did he use to sing?
¿Acostumbraba cantar él? o ¿Cantaba él?
Didn't he use to sing?
¿No acostumbraba cantar? o ¿No cantaba él?

EXERCISE 5.
Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative.
1. They used to speak English well.
2. He used to live in Colonia del Valle.
3. We used to have a car.
4. you used to go to the movies on Saturday.
5. Grandmother used to stay with us during the winter.
6. The children used to take the bus on this corner.
7. We used to get up at six-thirty.
8. Martha used to walk to school.
9. John used to receive letters from Helen.
10. Mr. Adams used to bring the milk early.

EXERCISE 6.
Change the following sentences to the past tense, using used + (infinitive).
Translate each time.
1. He works in that office.
2. She goes back on Tuesday.
3. They go to bed very early.
4. Henry plays baseball.
5. I stay with my sister's children.
6. Ruth dances well.
7. Mr. Adams drives the car.
8. Mr. Madison closes the store at nine o'clock.
9. The teachers dictate sentences every day.
10. We eat Mexican food.

EXERCISE 7.
Translate the following questions. Answer them in the affirmative and in the
negative.
1. Did he use to feed the cows at night?
2. Did she use to get on the bus in front of the hotel?
3. Did the children use to get scared at night?
4. Did the president use to hunt lions in Africa?
5. Did you use to speak English?
6. Did they use to listen to the radio every night?
7. Did she use to pick her own clothes out?
8. Did your wife use to read before going to sleep?
9. Did Mr. Madison use to make money without working?
10. Did the children use to spend all their time at the movies?

EXERCISE 8.
Translate into Spanish.
1. I used to be able to make a living without working very hard.
2. My raincoat wore out before the rainy season was over.
3. how long does it take to go downtown by bus?
4. It didn't take long to learn how to swim, did it?
5. We have English every other day.
6. He said it'd take a long time to learn English, but he was wrong, wasn't he?
7. I just saw them ten minutes ago.
8. He just left a little while ago.
9. Didn't she use to have long hair?
10. Don't push. There's enough room for everyone.
11. He said we should have slept late every other day.
12. I'm going to find out why he gave up his job.
13. There were so many people at the movies that we could hardly get in. Then after
we got in, we couldn't get out.
14. I knew that it'd be very cold in Chicago this fall.
15. I've waited for him since then o'clock, and he isn't here yet. I'm going to give up
and go home.

EXERCISE 9.
Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
last pick out practice rest
need pick up pronounce smile (at)
notice push play remember
open pull prefer shout (at)
pass place reach rain

EXERCISE10
Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
get ready get on have leave
get wet get better hear lie down
get drunk get worse hang lose
get sick get in hide let
get scared get out keep lend

EXERCISE 11. Verb Practice. Find out: enterar, averiguar.

1. The doctor finds out about everything, doesn't he?
2. The doctor doesn't find out about everything, does he?
3. how does the doctor find out about everything?
4. The doctor found out about it, didn't he?
5. The doctor didn't find out about it, did he?
6. how did the doctor find out about it?
7. The doctor is going to find out as soon as possible, isn't he?
8. The doctor isn’t going to find out as soon as possible, is he?
9. Is the doctor going to find out as soon as possible?
10. The doctor was going to find out last night, wasn't he?
11. The doctor wasn't going to find out last night, was he?
12. how was the doctor going to find out last night?
13. The doctor will find out next week, won't he?
14. The doctor won't find out next week, will he?
15. how will the doctor find out next week?
16. The doctor wanted to find out about it yesterday, didn't he?
17. The doctor didn't want to find out about it yesterday, did he?
18. Did the doctor want to find out about it yesterday?
19. The doctor has to find out about a lot of things, doesn't he?
20. The doctor doesn't have to find out about a lot of things. does he?
21. Why does the doctor have to find out about so many things?
22. The doctor has found out about the party at the club. hasn't he?
23. The doctor hasn't found out about the party at the club, has he?
24. how has the doctor found out about the party at the club?
25. The doctor would find out about the job in the store, wouldn't he?
26. The doctor wouldn't find out about the job in the store, would he?
27. how would the doctor find out about the job in the store?
28. The doctor should find out about the movie downtown, shouldn't he?
29. The doctor shouldn't find out about the movie downtown, should he?
30. Shouldn't the doctor find out about the movie downtown?
31. The doctor would be able to find out, wouldn't he?
32. The doctor wouldn't be able to find out, would he?
33. how would the doctor be able to find out?
34. The doctor should have found out in the morning, shouldn’t he have?
35. Should the doctor have found out in the morning?
36. Shouldn't the doctor have found out in the morning?

EXERCISE 12. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 7, using forms of the verbs smile, add, agree, push, pull, give up,
get in, get out, in short sentences. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 13.
Read and translate.
THE CAMEL AND THE PIG
Once there was a camel that was always laughing at a pig because he was so short.
“It's much better to be short than tall," the pig used to say when the camel laughed
at him. “No," the camel replied “you're wrong. Those who are tall have all the
advantages. If you'll come with me, I'll show you what I mean. There are many
things that I can do because I'm tall, and there are many things that you can't do
because you're short." “If it isn't better to be short," replied the pig I'll give up my
nose." “And if it isn’t better to be tall," answered the camel I'll give up my hump." As
the pig and the camel walked along the road, they came to an orchard that had a
high wall around it. The camel easily put his long neck over the wall and ate all he
wanted of the apples, peaches, and oranges that were growing there. The pig
couldn't even see the fruit from where he was standing on the ground because he
was so short. After the camel had enough, he turned to the pig and asked “Now, do
you think it's better to be tall or short?" A little later, as the two walked down the
road together, they carne to another orchard that had a wall around it so high that
not even the camel could reach over it with his long neck. The pig, however, saw a y
low gate that was only three feet high in the side of the wall. He easily ran through
the low gate and began to eat the fruit that was growing inside. “Why don't you
come in?" the pig asked the camel as he went through the gate. ''The fruit inside is
very good." ''I can't get in," answered the camel, ''because I'm too tall." When the
pig, full of fruit, came out of the garden, he asked the camel, "Now, is it better to be
tall or short?" The camel thought for a minute and then answered ''Sometimes it's
better to be short." Then the pig added, ''And sometimes it's better to be tall." Since
the camel and the pig both agreed that being short sometimes has its advantages
and being tall sometimes has its advantages too, the pig kept his nose, and the
camel kept his hump.

EXERCISE 14. Write in English.

1. Ella me sonrió cuando se metió en el coche.
2. Jalé y empué la puerta, pero no se abrió.
3. ¿No acostumbrabas jugar al otro lado de la calle?
4. Los niños empezaron a comer tan pronto como se puso la mesa.
5. Debería haber más tiempo para estudiar.
6. ¿Está Ud. de acuerdo con él?
7. Se agregan las letras er al adjetivo para formar el grado comparativo.
8. Podrá trabajar en algún país donde se hable castellano.
9. Se terminará el trabajo antes de las siete y media de la noche.
10. Si tienes un buen empleo, no lo dejes.

EXERCISE 15. Dictation.

1. We couldn't get in because the gate was broken.
2. lnstead of pulling, she was pushing.
3. The oranges were eaten before breakfast.
4. You're wrong. They used to open the market at nine o'clock.
5. It'll take a long time to play a game of football.
6. ls Popo the highest mountain in Mexico?
7. They didn't believe what he said. Nevertheless, he told the truth.
8. Were the presents given to the children at the party?
9. That story isn't true.
10. If you can speak English, you'll have an advantage over the other girls that work
in the office.
EXERCISE 16. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative, using
forms of the expressions it takes a long time and it takes about
1. how long does it take to play a game of football?
2. how long does it take to go downtown by bus?
3. how long did it take to go to Monterrey by plane?
4. how long will it take to go to Africa by ship?
5. how long does it take to go to Chicago by train?
6. how long did it take them to go to New York by car?
7. how long will it take you to finish the book?
Answer the following questions in the negative, using forms of the expression it
doesn’t take long
8. how long does it take your wife to clean the house?
9. how long does it take Helen to make a dress?
10. how long will it take to get to the market?
11. how long did it take to write that letter?
12. how long does it take to learn English?
13. how long will it take to walk to school?
14. how long did it take them to learn the vocabulary?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
15. Did you use to live in Mexico City?
16. Did he use to speak English well?
17. Did they use to speak together every day?
18. Did she use to go to school?
19. Did you use to buy a new car every year?
20. Did he use to help his father in the office?
21. Did she use to make a living teaching English?
22. Did we use to have a good time in Acapulco?
23. Did the boys use to try hard to speak English?
24. Did John 's shoes use to wear out quickly?
25. Is it already noon?
26. Are they already here?
27. Have you already finished?
28. Have they already gone?
Answer the following questions.
29. What time did you get ready?
30. When did the children get sick?
31. Why did the boys get scared?
32. When did your mother get better?
33. When did Mr. Adams get worse?
34. how did you get in the movie?
35. how did you get out of the garden?
36. Where did you get on the bus?
LESSON 11.
VOCABULARY.
1. to touch, touched, Tocar. 13. elephant Elefante.
touched,
2. to satisfy, satisfied, satisfacer 14. snake Víbora.
satisfied
3. to return, returned, Retornar. 15. guide Guía.
returned
4. to examine, examined, Examiner. 16. zoo Zoológico.
examined
5. to appear, appeared, Aparecer. 17. tail Cola.
appeared,
6. to seem, seemed, Parecer. 18. trunk Trompa. Baúl.
seemed.
7. therefore Por lo tanto. 19. fan Ventilador.
8. real Real. 20. rope Cuerda.
Really. Realmente. 21. rest Descanso.
9. blind Ciego. 22. impression Impresión.
blindness Ceguera. 23. judgment Juicio.
10. silly Tonto. 24. lake Lago.
11. flat Plano. 25. purse Bolsa.
12. round Redondo. 26. so far Tan lejos. Hasta
ahora.
IDIOMS.
1. to make, let, help (someone) do Hacer, dejar, ayudar que (alguien) haga
something algo
He made me go. Él me hizo ir.
He let me come. Él me dejó venir.
He helped me study. Él me ayudó a estudiar.
2. to get lost Perder.
3. to get tired Cansar.
4. each other El uno al otro,
They love each other. Ellos se quieren.
5. negation..at all Negación…en absoluto
They ate nothing at all. No comieron nada en absoluto.
6. on time A tiempo
7. once in a while de vez en cuando
8. the house, building, car, etc. across La casa, edificio, coche, etc. de
the street enfrente.
9. What's he, (she) it like? ¿Cómo es él, (ella)?
What are they like? ¿Cómo son?

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. Let's find out about it.
2. before pushing
3. after pushing
4. without pushing
5. besides pushing
6. What are you pushing for?
7. Who are you going to go with?
8. What were you talking about?
9. There's a zoo in the park.
10. There isn't a zoo in the park.
11. Is there a zoo in the park?
12. There was a zoo near the park.
13. There wasn't a zoo near the park.
14. Was there a zoo near the park?
15. There'll be a zoo in Mexico City.
16. There won't be a zoo in Mexico City.
17. Will there be a zoo in Mexico City?
18. There's always been a zoo here.
19. There hasn't always been a zoo here.
20. Has there always been a zoo here?

THE SUB UNCTIVE. EL SUBUNTIVO

Puesto que en inglés el subjuntivo ha sido absorbido por otros tiempos verbales,
podemos decir que ya casi no existe. Así es que el presente y el pasado del
subjuntivo en español se traducirán al inglés por el presente y el pasado del
indicativo respectivamente, excepto en los casos ilustrados adelante. Ejemplos:
He's going to eat before she comes. Él va a comer antes de que ella venga.
When they leave, we are going to close the Cuando salgan ellos, vamos a cerrar las
windows. ventanas.
He was going to eat before she came. Él iba a comer antes de que ella viniera.

EL USO DEL INFINITIVO EN INGLÉS EQUIVALE AL PRESENTE DEL SUBUNTIVO

EN ESPAI'OL
Cuando una forma del verbo sigue a un sustantivo o a un pronombre complemento
(me, you him, her, it, us, you, them), ésta será el infini tivo con la partícula to. En
español se usará el presente o el pasado del subjuntivo para la traducción
correspondiente, según el tiempo del verbo que precede al sustantivo o al
pronombre objetivo. Esta construcción se usa mucho después de formas del verbo
want, tell y ask. Estudie las siguientes oraciones:
1. I want him to come early. 2. They want me to go tomorrow.
Quiero que él venga temprano. Ellos quieren que yo vaya mañana.
3. We want John to speak English. 4. They always tell him to come early.
Queremos que Juan hable inglés. Ellos siempre le dicen a él que venga
temprano.
5. I'm going to tell her to go tomorrow. 6. Tell them to bring the money.
Le voy a decir a ella que vaya mañana. Diles a ellos que traigan el dinero.
7. Ask him to explain it. 8. I'll ask him to buy it.
Pídele a él que lo explique. Le pediré a él que lo compre.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. She wants him to finish before two -thirty.
2. She doesn’t want him to finish before two -thirty.
3. Does she want him to finish before two-thirty?
4. Doesn't she want him to finish before two-thirty?
5. When does she want him to finish?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs turn, tie, travel, remember, ride, send,
stay, pull, find out. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in the
exercise above. Use a different combination of a nominative and objective noun or
pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 4. Verb Practice.

1. you tell them to eat three times a day.
2. you don't tell them to eat three times a day.
3. Do you tell them to eat three times a day?
4. Don't you tell them to eat three times a day?
5. Why don’t you tell them to eat three times a day?

EXERCISE 5.
Verb Practice Make short sentences with forms of the verbs ump, hunt,
hide, get off, get on, give, decide, dance, cover. Expand each verb practice to
include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different combination of a
nominative and objective noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative
words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 6.
The following sentences are in the present passive voice. Translate them and
change them to past passive, future passive, present perfect passive, past perfect
passive, conditional passive and obligation passive. Translate each time, using the
se form in Spanish.
1. The sentences are changed to the past tense.
2. Is all the money lost at the horse races?
3. All the workers aren't paid the same day.
4. Is all the work done in the morning?
5. All the money is spent at once.

EXERCISE 7.
Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative. Notice that we use the infinitive without to after forms of the
verbs make, let, help.
1. I'm going to let him help me.
2. They helped him do all the work.
3. I'll make them pay you.
4. We ought to make the children get up earlier.
S. They always help me do my homework.
6. He let the boys put on their coats.
7. We must make the pupils pronounce the words correctly.
8. you should let your daughter speak English.
9. The teacher will help the students read the lesson.
10. He wants us to make them come to class on time.

EXERCISE 8. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative.

1. Make them help me.
2. Help me wash the car.
3. Make him leave me alone.
4. Please make them learn the verbs.
5. Please make the girls come home early.
6. Please help him get on the horse.

EXERCISE 9. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Are they going to let him help us?
2. Did he help you answer the questions?
3. Did you let the pupils bring their books?
4. Do you let the girls read in class?
5. Are you going to let them finish before ten o'clock?
6. Did you help the workers close the doors and windows?
7. Did you make him help you?
8. Will they make Mr. Brent open the office earlier?
9. Do you make your children go to bed early?
10. Did you help the pupils learn the vocabulary?

EXERCISE 10. Translate into Spanish.

1. I want you to be able to make a living when you get married.
2. Do you want your old purse to wear out so you can buy a new one?
3. how long did it take them to build that house across the street?
4. She's going to make her husband build a closet in the bedroom.
5. We used to get lost in Mexico City every day.
6. Lucy and Henry are never on time, and I get tired of waiting for them.
7. Once in a while I go to the movies on Sunday afternoon.
8. I've just examined this book, and I don't like it at all.
9. They give presents to each other every year.
10. Make her get ready on time.
11. It didn’t take her long to spend the rest of the money.
12. Don't let the dog get out of the garden because it'll get lost.
13. There should be some nice weather now that the rainy season is over.
14. The stores will be opened tomorrow on time.
15. how long does it take to swim across the lake?

EXERCISE 11. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
spill try translate use
satisfy turn travel visit
save turn off tie work
stay turn on talk wash
seem turn over touch wait (for)

EXERCISE 12. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
make pay see stand up
meet read speak set
mean run sit sing
put ride sleep swim
put on say sell shake

TO THE TEACHER
Because of the many different verb tenses and constructions studied up to this time,
it will be impossible to include a model in each lesson of all the verb tenses and
constructions that should be practiced in these exercises. Therefore, from now on, a
model of one tense to be expanded to all the tenses with which the students are
familiar will be included in each lesson.

EXERCISE 13. Verb Practice.

Desarrolle la siguiente práctica verbal hasta incluir todos los tiempos estudiados
hasta ahora, agregando el uso de un complemento (nombre o pronombre) seguido
de un infinitivo.
1. She touches it. 4. Doesn't she touch it?
2. She doesn't touch it. 5. What does she touch?
3. Does she touch it?

EXERCISE 14. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs satisfy, return, examine, appear,
seem, get lost, get tired. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as
in the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the
interrogative words when it is possible.

NOT ANTES DE UN INFINITIVO

En inglés se coloca la partícula not antes de un infinitivo para negar con éste.
Ejemplos:
1. They tell me not to speak English.
2. Are you going to tell him not to go?
3. He isn't going to tell her not to come.
4. She doesn’t want to tell him not to work tomorrow.
5. We'll ask them not to talk.

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.

Cuando sea posible, desarrolle la siguiente práctica verbal en las formas del
presente progresivo, presente del futuro idiomático, futuro, antepresente, y presente
de necesidad de los verbos want, tell y ask seguidos de un complemento (nombre o
pronombre) más un infinitivo. Practique usando los infinitivos en negativo. Con cada
tiempo use el afirmativo, negativo, interrogativo e interrogativo negativo. Use las
palabras interrogativas cuando sea posible. Ejemplos.
1. He is telling me (not) to examine the book. (present progressive)
Él me está diciendo que (no) examine el libro.
2. He's going to tell me (not) to examine the book. (idiomatic future)
Él va a decirme que (no) examine el libro.
3. He will tell me (not) to examine the book. (future)
Él me dirá que (no) examine el libro.
4. He has told me (not) to examine the book. (present perfect)
Él me ha dicho que (no) examine el libro.
5. He has to tell me ( not) to examine the book. (necessity)
Él tiene que decirme que (no) examine el libro.
6. He should tell me ( not) to examine the book. (obligation)
Él debería decirme que (no) examine el libro.

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

1. He tells me to examine the papers.
2. He doesn't tell me to examine the papers.
3. Does he tell me to examine the papers?
4. Doesn't he tell me to examine the papers?
5. When does he tell me to examine the papers?

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs marry, get married, touch, return,
play, dress. Expand each verb practice to include (different tenses, as in the
exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the
interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 18.
Read and translate.
THE FIVE BLIND MEN AND THE ELEPHANT
Once there were five blind men who were taken on a trip to the zoo "to see" the
animals. "Since you can't see," their guide said to them, "you must touch the
animals and then tell each other what you think they're like (cómo son). Here's a
huge animal called an elephant. We'll start with him." The first blind man went up to
the elephant and touched his huge side with both hands. He felt the elephant's side
until he was satisfied that he had seen" the elephant. "The elephant," he told the
rest of the blind men is exactly like a solid wall." The second blind man walked up to
the elephant and put his hand on
the elephant's large ear. Then he turned to the first blind man and said to him.
"You're completely wrong. The elephant isn’t like a wall at all. He appears to me to
be much more like a large fan." When the third blind man reached the elephant, he
touched the elephant's trunk. When he went back to the rest of the blind men, he
said to the other two who had seen the elephant. "You're both crazy. I can't see that
the elephant looks like a wall or like a fan. He seems to me to be like a long snake."
"Let me touch the elephant," said the fourth blind man and I'll tell you what he's
really like." So the fourth blind man very carefully took the elephant by the tail. After
examining the elephant's tail, he said to his friends "I told you that I'd be able to tell
you the truth about the elephant. We can all see' that is exactly like a rope."
"You're crazy," said the second blind man. "He's like a big fan." "You're the one who
is crazy," said the first. "I say he's like a wall." "You don't know what you're talking
about ," said the third one. "The elephant appears to be nothing but a kind of
snake." "Wait," said the fifth blind man. "I still have a chance to examine , the
elephant and give you my impression. I'm sure that I'll be able to do better than the
rest of you." The fifth blind man placed his hands on the elephant's leg and studied
it a long time. Satisfied, at last, that he knew exactly what the elephant , was like,
he returned to his friends. "Where did you get such silly ideas?" he asked them.
"I've examined the elephant completely, and I think that he's too big to be a snake
or a rope. And a wall is flat, not round, like the elephant. The elephant couldn't be
like a fan because a fan is thin and the elephant is thick. I found that the elephant
was big, round, solid, and thick; therefore, the elephant must be like a tree."
The five blind men left the zoo, each one with a different impression of what an
elephant was like, because with incomplete knowledge they had formed bad
judgments.

EXERCISE 19. Write in English.

1. Bajémonos aquí.
2. ¿Quieres que haga yo que él te ayude?
3. Estos chicos tontos se perdieron, ¿verdad?
4. No le voy a decir a él que estudie.
5. Pon el ventilador. Hace mucho calor aquí.
6. Ha de haber algunas serpientes en el zoológico.
7. ¿Son los elefantes los animales más grandes de África?
8. Le he dicho a él cien veces que no ponga los pies en el sofá.
9. Ellos se ayudaron.
10. De vez en cuando Ud. llega a tiempo, ¿verdad?

EXERCISE 20. Dictation.

1. The land here is very flat.
2. Do you want me to show you some brown purses?
3. This dress doesn't fit you, does it?
4. this room seems cold.
5. Those men aren't really blind, are they?
6. Have you ever been to the zoo?
7. how long does it take to walk to the zoo?
8. All those animals were captured in Africa.
9. They want the doctor to examine the child again.
10. There ought to be a telephone in this office.

EXERCISE 21. Conversation: Answer the following questions in the affirmative and
in the negative.
1. Did they make him bring his book?
2. Did you make them speak?
3.Is he going to make you come tomorrow?
4. Is he going to make you go on Saturday?
5. Will she make us work?
6. Will she make us learn English?
7. Do you make her get up early?
8. Do you make her go to bed early?
Answer the following questions.
9. how many children did they have?
10. Where did you hang your overcoat?
11. Where did the children hide?
12. Where did you keep the letters?
13. When did you live in Cuernavaca?
14. Where did you lose your raincoat?
15. Why did you let him come in?
16. how much money did you lend your brother?
17. Where did you meet Mr. Brent?
18. Why did you put on your best suit?
19. how much did they pay him?
20. how many books did she read?
21. When did we ride the horses?
22. What did they say?
23. What did she see?
24. Where did you sit?
25. Where did they sleep?
26. Are you still speaking English?
27. Is John still in the United States?
28. Is she still having a good time?
29. how long will it take us to walk to the market?
30. how long does it take to become a doctor?

LESSON 12.
VOCABULARY.
1. to explain, explained, Explicar. 14. object Objeto.
explained.
2. t o mo ve , mo ve d, Mover. 15. brain Cerebro.
mo ve d
3. to lift, lifted, Levantar. brains Sesos.
lifted
4. to own, owned, Poseer. 16. fact Hecho.
owned
5. to avoid, avoided, Evitar. 17. strength Fuerza.
avoided
6. to bet, bet, bet Apostar. 18. shirt Camisa.
7. intelligent Inteligente. 19. tie Corbata. Atar.
Empate.
8. proud Orgulloso. 20. belt Cinturón.
proudly Orgullosamente. 21. sock Calcetín.
9. stupid Estúpido. 22. handkerchief Pañuelo.
10. smart listo 23. glove Guante.
11. strange Extraño. 24. skirt Falda.
12. back Atrás. 25. hose Medias. Manguera.
13. mind Mente. stocking media

IDIOMS.
1. to keep (someone) from (doing impedir o no dejar que (alguien haga
something) algo)
He kept me from coming. Me impidió que viniera.
2. Explain this tense to me. Explícame este tiempo.
Explain it to me. Explícamelo.
3. to get dark Oscurecer.
4. to get light Amanecer.
5. on the other hand En cambio.
6. one at a time Uno por uno
7. at least Al menos.
8. any color Cualquier color.
anyone (anybody) Cualquiera.
Anyone (Anybody) can learn English. Cualquiera puede aprender inglés.
Anywhere (any place) En cualquier parte.
Anything. cualquier cosa

EXERCISE 1
Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading them.
1. before agreeing.
2. after agreeing.
3. instead of agreeing.
4. in spite of agreeing.
5. without agreeing.
6. What's he pushing for?
7. What was he pushing for?
8. What did he push for?
9. What's he going to push for?
10. What was he going to push for?
11. What do you want him to push for?
12. There'd been many people downtown.
13. There hadn't been many people downtown.
14. Hadn't there been many people downtown?
15. There'd be a lot of time left.
16. There wouldn't be much time left.
17. Wouldn't there be a lot of time left?
18. There should be music at the party.
19. There shouldn't be music at the party.
20. Should there be music at the party?

EL USO DEL NFINITIVO EN INGLÉS EQUIVALE AL PASADO DEL SUBJUNTIVO EN

ESPAOL
Cuando una forma del verbo sigue a un sustantivo o a un pronombre objetivo (me,
you, him, her, it, us, you, them), ésta será el infinitivo con la partícula to. En
español se usará el presente o el pasado del subjuntivo para la traducción
correspondiente, según el tiempo del verbo que precede al sustantivo o al
pronombre obetivo. Esta construcción se usa mucho después de formas de los
verbos want, tell y ask. Ejemplos.
1. I wanted him to come early. Yo quería que él viniera temprano.
2. They wanted me to go tomorrow. Ellos querían que yo fuera mañana.
3. We wanted John to speak English. Queríamos que Juan hablara inglés.
4. They always told me to come early. Ellos siempre me decían que viniera
temprano.
5. I was going to tell her to go Yo le iba a decir a ella que fuera
tomorrow. mañana.
6. He told them to bring the money. Él les dijo a ellos que trajeran el dinero.
7. The teacher asked us to speak more. El profesor nos pidió que habláramos
más.
8. I asked him to buy it. Le pedí a él que lo comprara.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. She wanted him to finish.
2. She didn't want him to finish.
3. Did she want him to finish?
4. Didn't she want him to finish?
5. When did she want him to finish?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs hurry, hide, grow, fight, escape,
marry, drive, drop, agree. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as
in the exercise above. Use a different combination of a nominative and an objective
noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 4. Verb Practice.

1. you told them to eat.
2. you didn't tell them to eat.
3. Did you tell them to eat?
4. Didn’t you tell them to eat?
5. What did you tell them to eat?

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs get up, come, buy, drink, break,
believe, help, fix, get married. Expand each verb practice to include different
tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different combination of a nominative and
an objective noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is
possible.

EXERCISE 6.
The following sentences are in the present passive voice. Translate them and
change them to the past passive, future passive, present perfect passive, past
perfect passive, conditional passive, and obligation passive. Translate each time,
using the se form in Spanish.
1. The money is spent for clothes.
2. Fruit is sold in the market.
3. Fish is eaten for dinner.
4. The letters are put in the box.
5. Flowers are found in the garden.

LA FORMA CONCISA CON LOS AUXILIARES

La respuesta a una pregunta en la conversación se forma empleando el pronombre
correspondiente al sujeto y repitiendo el auxiliar empleado en la pregunta. Si se
emplea una forma del verbo be en la pregunta, también se empleará una forma del
verbo be en la respuesta. Si la respuesta va en afirmativo, empezará con la palabra
yes; y si va en negativo, empezará con la palabra no. Ejemplos:
1. Are you thirsty? Yes, I am. No, I'm not.
2. Does he speak English? Yes, he does. No, he doesn't.
3. Do you have any money? Yes, I do. No, I don't.
4. Does John have a book? Yes, he does. No, he doesn't.
5. Have you ever been to Acapulco? Yes, I have. No, I haven't.
6. Did my father open the door? Yes, he did. No, he didn't.
7. Are we going to eat? Yes, we are. No, we aren't.
8. Can Bill's brother speak Spanish? Yes, he can. No, he can't.
9. Couldn't they come earlier? Yes, they could. No, they couldn't.
10. Will you come tomorrow? Yes, I will. No, I won't.
11. Wouldn't you be happier in New York? Yes, I would. No, I wouldn't.
12. Should we wait until six? Yes, we should. No. we shouldn't.
13. Is there a phone in the office? Yes, there is. No, there isn't.

EXERCISE 7.
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative, using the
necessary pronoun as a subject and repeating the auxiliary used in the sentence.
1. Do you sleep well at night?
2. Did your sister visit your grandmother?
3. Has John found his book yet?
4. Can Mary go to the movies tonight?
5. Could she go with her mother?
6. Is he going to come late again?
7. Will the children stay at home?
8. Would your sister like to go to New York?
9. Does he often help his brother?
10. Aren't you sleepy yet?
11. Weren't there many girls at the party?
12. Is it cold in the United States in the winter?
13. Have your parents always lived in Mexico?
14. Were you born in the United States?
15. Can you speak both English and Spanish?
16. Can't you remember her name?
17. Don't you like Mexico when it rains?
18. Are there many pupils in the class?
19. Would John 's friend feel at home in Boston?
20. Did the teacher forget to pay you?
21. Can you lend me about five dollars?
22. Isn't it going to rain anymore?
23. Won't you take your raincoat with you?
24. Was there time to eat?

LA FORMA CONCISA CON LOS AUXILIARES

Cuando dos expresiones adversativas se unen por medio de la palabra but (o
cuando esta palabra se sobreentiende), la segunda expresión constará solamente
del sujeto y el auxiliar que corresponda al tiempo empleado. Si se emplea una
forma del verbo be en la primera expresión también se empleará una forma del
verbo be en la segunda expresión. Si el verbo en la primera expresión va en
afirmativo, el auxiliar en la segunda expresión irá en negativo; y si el verbo en la
primera expresión va en negativo, el auxiliar en la segunda expresión irá en
afirmativo. Ejemplos:
1. He's Mexican, but we aren't. Él es mexicano, pero nosotros no.
2. S he does n' t spe a k Sp an ish , but h e r b ro th e r Ella no habla español, pero su hermano
does . sí.
3. We have some money, but they Tenemos dinero, pero ellos no.
don't.
4. Albert hasn't been to Acapulco, but Alberto no ha estado en Acapulco, pero
Sulema has. Sulema sí.
5. my father went to the movies, but I Mi papá fue al cine, pero yo no.
didn't.
6. Bill's brother can't speak Spanish, but his sister El hermano de Bill no puede hablar español, pero su
can. hermana sí.
7. I'll come tomorrow, but Sara won't. Vendré mañana, pero Sara no.
8. you wouldn't be happier in Mexico, but Tú no serías más feliz en México, pero
I would. yo sí.
9. He should go, but your friend Él debería ir, pero su amigo no.
shouldn't.

EXERCISE 8. Fill the blanks with the correct auxiliary and translate.
1. I sleep well at night, but my wife .
2. My sister didn't go to the movies, but I .
3. George moved last year, but I .
4. I hadn't ever eaten that before, but he .
5. Mary can come with me, but her sister .
6. She couldn't write well, but her cousin .
7. He's going to speak, but his brother .
8. The children won’t stay at home, but we .
9. Your sister would like to visit us, but your brother .
10. He often helps, but I .
11. Bob's brother isn't sleepy yet, but we .
12. He says that there were many girls at the party, but there .
13. They think it isn't cold in California, but it .
14. My parents have always lived in Mexico, but I .
15. I wasn't born in the United States, but my brother .
16. We can speak both English and Spanish, but they .
17. She can’t ever remember my name, but he always .
18. Your cousin wouldn't like a tie, but we .
19. I don't like Mexico when it rains, but my mother .
20. you have always done your homework, but John .
21. Ed's mother wouldn't feel at home in Mexico, but mine .
22. The teacher forgot, but I .
23. He said it isn't going to rain any more, but it .
24. They won't take their raincoats, but we .
25. The girls like milk, but he .

EXERCISE 9. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. They kept him from going.
2. you can keep her from singing.
3. He'll keep us from coming.
4. We've kept you from working.
s. He's going to keep it from dying.
6. She'll keep us from talking.
7. The teacher will be able to keep them from playing.
8. His father ought to keep him from spending the money.
9. The girls should keep the children from eating the cake.
10. Mr. Adams kept me from bringing my friends.

EXERCISE 10. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did he keep you from listening to the music?
2. Will they keep her from getting married?
3. Does she keep you from visiting the United States?
4. Could you keep them from swimming?
5. Have we kept the girls from speaking Spanish?
6. Would Mr. Stone keep John from saving his money?
7. Shouldn't his parents keep him from traveling by plane?
8. Can't you keep the child from spilling the milk?
9. Will you be able to keep your husband from buying a new car?
10. Has the owner of the house been able to keep the thief from stealing the
clothes?

EXERCISE 11. Translate into Spanish.

1. Anyone can learn how to speak English if he tries.
2. You'll look good in any color.
3. I haven't been able to keep him from sleeping during the day.
4. We used to make our own clothes, didn't we?
5. He doesn't like to go to the United States during the winter, but I do.
6. At least we can keep him from coming so early.
7. how long should it take to drive from here to Puebla?
8. They can't make him speak English.
9. She'd just trans1ated the letter when we came.
10. you must go home before it gets dark.
11. The teacher began to teach without explaining the new tense to the students.
12. We'll go anywhere you want.
13. My wife went to the movies. She doesn't go any more.
14. On the other hand, I can't see why he won't be able to pay us.
15. I didn't want to dance any more, but she did.

EXERCISE 12. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
walk ask believe change want answer call correct watch arrive (in, at) clean clap
worry (about) add close cry avoid agree complete carry

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
shine tell wake up bring spend think wear break send take off wear out buy take
understand bet begin
teach write be able become

EXERCISE 14. Verb Practice.

Expand the following verb practice to include all the tenses studied so far. Use the
affirmative, negative, interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. The driver explained it to them, didn't he?
2. The driver didn't explain it to them, did he?
3. Did the driver explain it to them?
4. Didn't the driver explain it to them?
5. how many times did the driver explain it to them?

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs move, lift, own, avoid, bet, get dark,
get light, keep (someone) from (doing something). Expand each verb practice to
include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun
with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Cuando sea posible, desarrolle la siguiente práctica verbal en las formas del
presente y pasado progresivo, presente y pasado del futuro idiomático, futuro,
antepresente, antecopretérito, pospretérito,) obligación, presente y pasado de
necesidad de los verbos want, tell y ask seguidos de un complemento (nombre o
pronombre) más un infinitivo. Practique usando los infinitivos en negativo. Con cada
tiempo use el afirmativo, negativo, interrogativo e interrogativo negativo. Use las
palabras interrogativas cuando sea posible. Ejemplos.
1. They told me (not) to move. Ellos me dieron que (no) me moviera.
2. They were going to tell me (not) to Ellos iban a decirme que (no) me
move moviera.
3. They were telling me (not) to move. Ellos estaban diciéndome que (no) me
moviera.
4. They had told me (not) to move. Ellos me habian dicho que (no) me
moviera.
5. They would tell me (not) to move. Ellos me dirían que (no) me moviera.
6. They should tell me (not) to move. Ellos deberían decirme que (no) me
moviera.
7. They had to tell me (not) to move. Ellos tuvieron que decirme que (no) me
moviera.
They wanted to tell me (not) to move. Ellos quisieron decirme que (no) me
moviera.
1. They told me to move. 2. They didn't tell me to move.
3. Did they tell me to move? 4. Didn't they tell me to move?
5. What did they tell me to move for?

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs explain, lift, bet, pay, take off, get off.
Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use
a different combination of a nominative and objective noun or pronoun with each
verb. Practice using negative infinitives. Use the interrogative words when it is
possible.
EXERCISE 18. Read and translate.
TWO MEN AND SOME ROCKS
A farmer who owned some land that had a lot of rocks on it called the two men who
worked for him on the farm and said to them, "I want you to go to the field and move
all those big rocks so that I can work there tomorrow." One of these men had a
strong back and a weak mind, and the other one had a weak back and a strong
mind. The man who had a strong back was very proud of the fact that he was strong,
and he was always showing his friends his strength by lifting and carrying heavy
objects.
The friend, on the other hand, had a strong mind instead of a strong back; and he
was always using it to avoid heavy work, since he couldn't lift very much with a
weak back. On the way to the field the more intelligent of the two began a
conversation with the other one, saying, "What does this farmer think we are? He
sends us to the field like slaves to move some heavy rocks that should be work for
at least ten men. I'll bet that not even you, as strong as you are, can lift those
stones." "I can lift any stone in that field," replied the stupid man quickly. "Those
rocks are nothing. I've carried many rocks much farther than I'll have to carry
these." "I don't believe it," answered the man with the brains. "I don't believe that
anyone can carry rocks as big as those in the field." "When we get to the field, I'll
show you," said the man with the strong back. When the two men got to the field,
the smart one sat down in the shade and said to his friend, "Now let me see if you
can really lift those stones without any help." The stupid man took his shirt off and
started to work. He lifted the rocks on his back with great difficulty and carried them
out of the field one at a time. At last, when it began to get dark, he finished carrying
the last stone. Then he proudly said to his friend lying in the shade, "You see, I told
you that I was strong enough to carry these rocks. you didn’t think I could do it, did
you?" "No," answered the intelligent one getting up, "I didn't think you could do it,
but you really are as strong as you say, aren't you?"

EXERCISE 19. Write in English.

1. Han de ser casi las seis. Está amaneciendo en el este.
2. Hice grandes esfuerzos para impedir que él diera todos los nombres.
3. ¿Por qué no quería que él apostara?
4. ¿Crees que él podrá levantar aquella roca pesada?
5. Cualquiera debería poder traducir las oraciones.
6. Me gustaría decirle a él que no tiene razón.
7. Deberías decidir lo que quieres hacer antes de que dejes este empleo.
8. Ellas han tenido que decirle a ella tres veces que no copie el inglés de otra
gente.
9. Las otras alumnas no podrán ir, pero yo sí.
10. Te dieron que no dejaras que jugaran los niños en la calle, ¿verdad?

EXERCISE 20. Dictation.

1. you must clean these vases one at a time.
2. Why don’t you let us get on the bus? A few more people won’t make any
difference.
3. I want to speak to someone-anyone.
4. At least, he should have helped us.
5 The pupils have asked him to explain the lesson again.
6. They can't keep you from getting in, can they?
7. I can't lift these heavy boxes, but my husband can.
8. Alex is a smart boy.
9. He told me to give you the reddest tie I had.
10. Which of the boys is the most intelligent?

EXERCSE 21. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in
the negative.
1. Do you keep the children from playing in the house?
2. Did you keep the boys from swimming?
3. Will you keep the pupils from talking?
4. Are you going to keep him from going?
15. Have you kept him from getting up?
6. Could you keep him from becoming a doctor?
7. Are you going to keep her from going out?
8. Was she keeping him from having a good time?
9. Do they want to keep him from seeing that movie?
10. Did he want to keep you from listening to the radio?
11. Will I be able to keep her from speaking Spanish?
12. Has he been able to keep them from staying in Acapulco?
13. Would he be able to keep them from stealing?
14. Would she be able to keep him from arriving late?
15. Did you tell your father to keep that man from driving the car?
16. Did you want us to keep them from reading?
17. Do you make him help you?
18. Did you make her leave them alone?
19. Will you make us go early?
20. Would they make him come early?
21. Can he make her do the work?
22. Should she make us pay for the books?
23. Could they make him drive the car?
24. Do you want me to start the lesson?
25. Did you want him to believe you?
26. Will you want her to change the money?
27. Did she tell him to write the letters?
28. Will he tell us how to escape?
29. Do they tell him not to fight?
30. Will he tell her not to go out?
LESSON 13.
VOCABULARY.
1. to shoot, shot, Disparar. 13. half Mitad.
shot;
2. to na me , na med , Nombrar. 14. order Orden.
na med
3. to hurt, hurt, Herir. 15. post Poste.
hurt
4. to hit, hit, hit Pegar. 16. sign Señal.
5 . t o s m e l l , s m e l l e d , Oler. 17. shot Disparo.
smelled
6. to punish, punished, Castigar. 18. tyrant Tirano.
punished
7. certainly Ciertamente. 19. stream Corriente. Arroyo.
8. calm Calma. 20. air Aire.
Calmy Calma. 21. arrow Flecha.
9. brave Bravo. bow and arrow Arco y flecha
10. except excepto 22. heart Corazón.
11. square Cuadrado. 23. deer Venado.
park Parquet. 24. bear Oso.
12. distance Distancia. 25. Europe Europa

IDIOMS.
1. to stop + Dejar de.- W h o w e r e y o u n a m e d ¿ C ó m o q u i é n t e l l a m a s ?
after?
(gerund) (infinitivo)
He stopped Él dejó de hablar. What did they name ¿Cómo lo
talking. him? llamaron?
2. to get hurt Lastimar. They named him Le pusieron Omar.
Omar.
He got hurt. Él se lastimo. 7. such a good Tan buen tiro.
shot
3. to hurt your hand, lastimarse la mano, 8. a pair of shoes Un par de zapatos.
leg, etc. pierna, etc.
She hurt her head. Ella se lastimó la a pair of socks Un par de
cabeza. calcetines.
4. to take care of Cuidar de a pair of stockings Un par de medias.
5. to go swimming, dancing,
riding
ir a nadar, bailar, a pair of gloves Un par de guantes.
montar
I went swimming, dancing, Fu i a n ad a r, b a ila r, 9. all that Todo eso.
riding.
mo n ta r.
6. I was named after my Me pusieron el nombre de 10. if I were you Si yo fuera tú.
father. mi papá

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. instead of explaining 10. He should dance, but you shouldn't.
2. besides explaining. 11. He isn't going to dance, but they
are.
3. He likes to dance, but I don't. 12. He wasn't going to dance, but they
 were.
4. He wants to dance, but they don't. 13. He isn't dancing, but you are.
5. He wanted to dance, but they didn't. 14. He wasn't dancing, but I was.
6. He can dance, but we can't. 15. He didn't have to dance, but she did.
7. He could dance, but you couldn't. 16. He hasn't danced, but they have.
8. He'll dance, but I won't. 17. He won't be able to dance, but we
will.
9. He'd dance, but she wouldn't. 18. It'll be cold.

THE PAST SUBJUNCTIVE. EL PASADO DEL SUBJUNTIVO

Con todos los verbos en inglés se usa el pasado que equivale al pasado del
subjuntivo en español. El pasado del subjuntivo del poder (pudiera) equivale a
could, la forma pasada del verbo be able. Ejemplos:
1. I f I cou ld sp ea k E ng lish , I wo u ld go t o th e S i yo pu d ie ra ha b la r ing lé s, irí a a lo s E st a do s
Un ite d St at e s. Un id o s.
2. They would learn Spanish if they came to class Ellos aprenderían español si vinieran a clase todos
every day. los días.
3. If we ha d mo ne y, we wo u ld b u y a ca r. S i t u vié ra mo s d ine ro , co mp ra rí a mo s u n co ch e .
4. He wo u ld g o t o sch oo l if he kn e w h is le sso n. É l irí a a la e scu e la, si se su p ie ra la le sso n.
5. If you ate more for lunch, you wouldn't be hungry in Si comieras más en la comida, no tendrías hambre
the afternoon. en la tarde.

TO THE TEACHER
Contemporary grammarians agree that the use of were with a singular subject in
statements contrary to fact (after the word if and after the verb wish) has now been
replaced by was as the past subjunctive of be. In constructions such as If I were a
movie star, were was standard. English until three hundred years ago. Since then,
was has been gradually taking the place of were in these constructions; and the
preferred form today is if I was a movie star and I wish I was a movie star . In
present-day, in English there is only one expression where were is preferred with a
singular pronoun. This is the expression if I were you.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. if I was speaking 8. if she wasn’t speaking
2. if I wasn't speaking 9. If we were speaking
3. if you were speaking 10. If we weren't speaking
4. if you weren't speaking 11. If you were speaking
5. if he was speaking 12. if you weren’t speaking
6. if he wasn't speaking 13. if they were speaking
7. if she was speaking 14. if they weren’t speaking

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 2 using forms of the verbs work, read, explain, speak, knock, push,
pull, travel, hide.

EXERCISE 4. Verb Practice.

1. if I ate 8. if she didn’t get married
2. if I didn't eat 9. if we umped
3. if you danced 10. if we didn’t jump
4. if you didn't dance 11. if you paid
5. if he spoke 12. if you didn't pay
6. if he didn't speak 13. If they put on
7. if she got married 14. if they didn't put on

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 4., using forms of the verbs be, lend, bet, keep, remember, spend,
stay, touch, win.

PRONOMBRESREFLEXIVOS
I myself yo rnismo, me it itself en sí
you yourself tú mismo, te we ourselves nosotros mismos,
nos
he himself él mismo, se you yourselves Uds. mismos, se
she herself ella misma, se they themselves ellos mismos, se

Se usan los pronombres reflexivos al referirse al sujeto yo para hacer hincapié

sobre el mismo sujeto. Cuando el pronombre reflexivo es complemento, seguirá al
verbo. Cuando se usa para énfasis, se puede colocar directamente después del
sujeto o al fin de la oración. Ejemplos:
1. He's talking to himself. (reflexive Él se está hablando a sí mismo.
2. you must help yourself first. Tu tienes que ayudarte a ti mismo
(reflexive) primero.
3. I told you that myself. (emphatic) Yo mismo te dije eso a ti.
I myself told you that. (emphatic)
4. We'll pay them ourselves. (emphatic) Nosotros mismos les pagaremos a ellos.
We ourselves will pay them. (emphatic)

La preposición by seguida de un pronombre reflexivo equivale a solo o sin ayuda en

español. Ejemplos:
1. They went by themselves. Ellos fueron solos.
2. I don't want to sit by myself. No quiero estar sentada sola.
3. She can do the work by herself. Ella puede hacer el trabajo sola.
4. You'll have to sleep by yourself. Tendrás que dormir solo.

EXERCISE 6. Fill the blanks with the correct reflexive pronoun and translate.
1. Those people don’t see as we see them.
2. That old man talks to .
3. I won't be able to fix the car by .
4. She was singing to .
5.You saw it .
6. I wrote that letter .
7. She doesn't like to eat by .
8. We will explain what happened .
9. Why can't you do this ?
10. We must help first .
11. Did you go to the movies by ?
12. He stole that money .
13. The city is not very large .
14. They can't learn English by .
15. The trip wasn't very long .

EXERCISE 7. Fill the blanks with the correct auxiliary and translate.
1. I can’t help you tomorrow, but he .
2. They didn’t speak, but we .
3. He won't believe me, but she .
4. They always eat early, but I .
5. She couldn't go, but you .
6. He's here, but his wife .
7. I wanted to help him, but they .
8. We've seen that movie, but she .
9. They'll have to work tomorrow, but we .
10. They're sick, but we .

EL ARTICULO THE
1. No se usa el artículo the antes de títulos seguidos de un apellido.
President Stone will speak tomorrow.
Professor White will arrive at eight o'clock.
Use el artículo the antes de un título que no es seguido de un apellido.
The president will speak tomorrow.
The professor will arrive at eight o'clock.
2. No usar el artículo the con palabras empleadas en sentido general.
I like cofee.
Women shouldn't talk so much.
Use el artículo the cuando se refiere a algo definido.
I like the coffee from Brazil.
The women at that meeting shouldn't talk so much.

EXERCISE 8. Fill the blanks with the article the when it is required and translate.
1. I want you to call Dr. Chandler.
2. man is an animal.
3. Well give it to Mrs. Jones.
4. Do you want me to call doctor?
5. milk is very expensive.
6. milk I bought yesterday isn't good.
7. I'd like to speak to Mr. Stone.
8. Everybody likes bread.
9. Did you like bread I bought yesterday?
10. We saw general yesterday.
11. We didn't see General Gates.
12. charity begins at home.
13. He likes blue suits.
14. He likes blue suit that John has.

LA FORMA CONCISA CON LOS AUXILIARES

El equivalente en inglés de y tú (no), y él (no), y Juan (no), etc. es una pregunta
corta en afirmativo o negativo compuesta del sujeto con el auxiliar que corresponda
al tiempo empleado. Si se emplea una forma del verbo be en la oración, también se
empleará una forma del verbo be en la pregunta corta. Ejemplos:
1. I sleep well at night, do you? Duermo bien de noche, ¿y tú?
2. I'm Mexican, aren't you? Soy mexicano, ¿y tú no?
3. We don't have any money, do they? No tenemos dinero, ¿y ellos?
4. Mary has been to Monterrey, has Mary ha estado en Monterrey ¿y
Albert? Alberto?
5. Ben's sister can speak Spanish, can La hermana de Beto puede hablar español,
you? ¿y Uds.?
6. We couldn't do the homework, could No pudimos hacer la tarea, ¿y ellos?
they?
7. Omar is going to eat now, aren’t you? Omar va a comer ahora, ¿y tú no?
8. We won't wait for Henry, will you? No esperaremos a Enrique, ¿y tú?
EXERCISE 9. Fill the blanks with the correct translation of the Spanish in
parenthesis.
1. He wants to visit her. (¿y tú?)
2. We don't want to buy that book. (¿y Roberto?)
3. I'm going to stay late. (¿y él no?)
4. Martha couldn't eat her breakfast. (¿y Alex?)
5. We can go now. (¿y tú no?)
6. She's going to leave soon. (¿y nosotros?)
7. They had to buy more bread. (¿y tú?)
8. We wanted to finish our dress tonight. (¿y ella no?)
9. Paul has just finished his homework. (¿y tú no?)
10. my mother is making a cake. (¿y la tuya no?)
11. We weren't doing anything. (¿y ellas?)
12. Martin will wash his car tomorrow. (¿y tú no?)
13. They'd like to buy a new house. (¿y a él no?)
14. We wouldn't invite him. (¿y Uds.?)
15. He never used to eat between meals. (¿y ella?)
16. She was going to spend all her money. (¿y tú?).
17. Helen has a new dress. (¿y Rosa no?)
18. They can eat in the living room. (¿y yo no?)
19. We went to bed at nine. (¿y tú?)
20. He lives over there. (¿y ellos?)

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. He wants us to stop talking.
2. It's going to stop raining.
3. The wind stopped blowing about six o'clock.
4. I told them to stop speaking Spanish.
5. She thought he would stop spending his money.
6. He should stop drinking.
7. We'll stop driving so fast.
8. They wanted him to stop playing football.
9. The children have stopped making so much noise.
10. That child can stop crying.

EXERCISE 11. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did you stop speaking English?
2. Is he going to stop pronouncing the words?
3. Have they already stopped eating ?
4. Has his finger stopped bleeding yet?
5. Couldn't you stop laughing ?
6. Will she be able to stop worrying about us?
7. Did you stop working on Sundays?
8. Will you stop waiting for your teacher every night?
9. Do you want me to stop singing?
10. Did they tell him to stop riding ?

EXERCISE 12. Translate into Spanish.

1. Mary used to take care of my children when I went to the movies.
2. Stop talking. I want you to hear what the teacher is saying.
3. Make him stop putting his fingers in his plate.
4. Anyone can stop drinking if he tries hard.
5. Can't you keep him from spending his money?
6. He'll be able to take care of his business himself.
7. I knew you'd get hurt if you didn't stop playing football.
8. She was named after her grandmother.
9. I don’t think this pair of shoes Will last very long.
10. What do you want me to buy a pair of gloves for?
11. Those soldiers aren’t very good shots, are they?
12. They didn't make him take care of the chickens, did they?
13. I can't swim across that river, can you?
14. They told me to keep the dogs from playing in the garden.
15. Alberto, You're a very lucky young man.

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
cover disappear fix fill capture dance escape form dictate die examine help drop
drown explain hurry
dress decide finish hunt

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
blow come back dig find build cut drive fly bleed catch eat fall(down) bet do feel.
Feed come drink forget fight
EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice.
Expand the following practice to include all the tenses studied so far. Use the
affirmative, negative, interrogative, and interrogative negative when it is possible.
1. You've shot an animal.
2. you haven't shot an animal.
3. Have you shot an animal?
4. Haven't you shot an animal?
5. how many times have you shot?

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs name, hurt, hit, smell, punish, get
hurt, take care of, cry. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in
the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the
interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

Expand the following verb practice to include as many tenses as possible that have
been studied so far. Repeat the exercise, using forms of the verbs want and ask
instead of tell with as many tenses as possible. Practice using negative infinitives.
1. They're going to tell him to shoot at the apple.
2. They aren't going to tell him to shoot at the apple.
3. Are they going to tell him to shoot at the apple?
4. Aren't they going to tell him to shoot at the apple?
5. how many times are they going to tell him to shoot at the apple?

EXERCISE 18. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs shoot, shoot (at), name, hurt, smell,
punish, get hurt, take care of, go dancing. Expand each verb practice to include
different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different combination of a
nominative and objective noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative
words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 19. Read and translate.

THE STORY OF WILLIAM TELL
Long ago in a small country in Europe there lived a man named William Tell. William
Tell was a hunter who loved the freedom of the streams and woods and the smell of
the fresh mountain air; and he spent a lot of his time there, hunting with his bow and
arrow, where he shot deer and bears and other animals to feed his family. After
years of practice Tell had become such a good shot with the bow and arrow that he
could hit a small animal two or three hundred feet from him. One day William Tell
read an order written by the tyrant of the country that said that a post with the
tyrant's hat on it had been placed in the city square, and all the people who passed
by the post had to take off their hats as a sign of respect. So, all the people,
because they were afraid, took their hats off when they passed by the post in the
square, all except one, a brave man named William Tell. "I won't even take off my
hat for the tyrant himself, and I certainly won't take it off for a post," said William
Tell. When the tyrant heard this, he got very angry and decided that the hunter
should be punished. "They say that you're a very good shot with the bow and arrow,"
said the tyrant to William Tell. "We're going to find out how good you are. Your small
son will be placed at a distance of three hundred feet from you. Then an apple will
be put on top of his head. You'll have to hit the apple with your bow and arrow.
You'll be given only one shot." William Tell said nothing. L:IE CA111",, took two
arrow and got ready. The arrow flew through the air and hit the apple. The little boy
wasn't hurt. "Since I told you that you could have only one shot, why did you, take
two arrows?" the tyrant asked William Tell. "I was going to shoot you through the
heart with the other one if I’ll had killed my son," was the answer.

EXERCISE 20. Write in English.

1. Si yo estuviera en tu lugar, saldría en seguida.
2. Ellos me prestarían el dinero, si lo tuvieran.
3. Los americanos no se dan la mano tanto como los mexicanos.
4. Si lloviera, no iríamos al centro.
5. Pablo no quería ir a Cuernavaca, pero Enrique sí.
6. No vi el juego de futbol, ¿y tú?
7. Si ellos entendieran español, irían a ver aquella película mexicana con nosotros.
8. Las lecciones más difíciles están en el segundo libro.
9. Los niños no se enfermarían tan a menudo si no comieran tantos (so much)
dulces.
10. No pudimos leer ese letrero, ¿y tú?

EXERCISE 21. Dictation.

1. I certainly don't want to go if it's raining, do you?
2. Has it stopped raining?
3. Will you take care of my flowers while I'm out of town?
4. He bought a pair of gloves, but she didn't.
5. If I were you, I'd buy a house instead of a car.
6. They told me to do the work myself.
7. We're always afraid that the children will fall and get hurt.
8. We won't be able to buy a television set (aparato) this year, Will you?
9. Stockings are more expensive now, aren't they?
10. Why don't you name your baby after me?

EXERCISE 22. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. how long does it take to learn how to dance?
2. how long did it take to explain the lesson to you?
3. how long does it take to get to Acapulco?
4. how long did it take you to walk to the movies?
5. how long Will it take you to wash these shirts?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
6. Do you take care of your clothes?
7. Did he take care of his car?
8. Will she take care of her parents?
9. Do you want me to take care of your dog?
10. Were they going to go dancing last Saturday night?
11. Would you like to go dancing.at the Patio?
12. Would you like to go swimming?
13. Will you be able to go swimming with me next week?
14. Does she like to go dancing every night?
15. Has he stopped reading ?
16. Has it stopped snowing
17. Did it stop raining ?
18. Will the wind stop blowing ?
19. Do you want me to stop playing?
20. Did he tell them to stop working?
21. Were they going to tell her to stop speaking?
22. Did he do the work himself
23. Did she clean the house by herself
24. Did they write the book themselves?
25. Was he talking to himself
26. Did you make that dress yourself
27. Did you let them help you?
28. Did he help her wash the windows?
29. Can you keep them from playing football?
30. Will you keep her from going out?

LESSON 14.
VOCABULARY.
1. to bother, bothered, Molestar. 13. pot Olla.
bothered
2. to coo k, co o ke d , Cocinar. 14. fire Fuego.
co o ked
3. to bofl, boiled, Hervir. 15. shelf Estante.
bofled
4. to cost, cost, Costar. 16. pocket Bolsillo.
cost
5. to throw, threw, Arrojar. 17. ticket Boleto.
thrown
6. to surprise, surprised, Sorprender. 18. ice Hielo.
surprised
7. widow Viuda. iceman Hielero.
8. beggar Mendigo. 19. tea. Té.
9. stranger Extraño. 20. vegetable Vegetal.
10. nail Clavo. Uña. 21. onion Cebolla.
11. key Llave. 22. tomato Jitomate.
12. silver Plata. 23. salt sal
silverware Cubiertos. 24. pepper pimienta;

IDIOMS.
1. to plan + planear + 5. in fact De hecho.
(infinitive) (infinitivo)
I plan to go to New Planeo ir a Nueva 6. a long ways Un largo camino.
York. York.
2. to get through Terminar. 7. Don't bother me. No me molestes.
He got through Él terminó de Stop bothering me. Deja de
eating. comer. molestarme.
He go t t h ro ug h b ef o re Él terminó antes de las 8. That's (It's) too Eso es muy malo.
te n diez.
bad.
3. to give (something) Regalar. That's (It's) a pity. Eso es una pena.
away
He gave it away. Lo regaló. That's (It's) a Eso es una pena.
shame.
He gave it to me. Me lo regaló. 9. I 'm g la d th at you Me alegro que hayas
ca me . venido.
4. it seems to me me parece

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. Notice this.
2. Let him punish them.
3. Don't let him punish them.
4. What's he shooting for?
5. What's he shooting at?
6. He likes soup, but I don't.
7. She wants to travel, but we don't.
8. They want to rest, but she doesn't.
9. We can't dance, but they can.
10. I can't speak English, but he can.
11. He knows his lesson, do you?
12. They can swim, can you?
13. She can help us, can you?
14. It's been hot.
15. Has it been hot?
16. Hasn't it been hot?
17. Had it been hot?
18. It'd be hot.
19. Would it be hot?
20. Wouldn't it be hot? ".

WOULD HAVE + PAST PARTICIPLE. EL ANTEPOSPRETÉRITO.

Se forma el antepospretérito en inglés anteponiendo los auxiliares would have al
participio. Se forma la contracción en afirmativo con la partícula d agregada al
pronombre. La contracción negativa es wouldn't have. Ejemplo.
You would (you'd) have eaten earlier. Tú habrías comido temprano.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. He'd have come 3. Wou ld he ha ve co me 5. Why wouldn’t he have come
ye st e rda y? yesterday?
yesterday.
2. He wo u ldn 't ha ve co me 4. Wo u ldn 't he ha ve co me
ye st e rda y. ye st e rda y?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 2, using past participles of the verbs find out, feed, knock, keep.
Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it
is possible.

EL USO DEL ANTEPRETÉRITO EN INGLÉS EQUIVALE AL ANTEPRETÉRITO DEL

SUBJUNTIVO EN ESPAÑOL
El antepretérito del subjuntivo en español, formado con el pasado del subjuntivo de
haber (hubiera) y el participio de un verbo, equivale al antepretérito en inglés.
Ejemplo:
If she had come, she would have eaten. Si ella hubiera venido, habría comido.

EXERCISE 4. Verb Practice.

1. if I'd worked 6. if he hadn't worked 11. if you'd worked
2. if l hadn't worked 7. if she’d worked 12. if you hadn't worked
3. if you’d worked 8. if she hadn’t worked 13. if they’d worked
4. if you hadn't worked 9. If we'd worked 14. if they hadn't worked
5. if he’d worked 10. if we hadn't worked

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

Repeat exercise 4, using forms of the verbs disappear, dig, bet, hit, hurt, find out,
feed, knock, keep. Use noun equivalents in place of some of the pronouns.
Whoever. Quien sea. Whichever. Cualquiera. Whenever. Cuando sea
Whatever. Lo que sea. Wherever. Donde sea.

Practice the following examples reading them aloud.

1. Whoever she is, she's beautiful. Quienquiera que ella sea, es hermosa.
2. Give the money to whoever comes Dale el dinero a quien venga primero.
first.
3. my mother will buy me whatever I Mi mamá me comprará lo que quiera.
want.
4. Wherever you are, I’ll find you. Dondequiera que estés, te encontraré.
5. Take whichever book you want. Lleva cualquier libro que quieras.
6. Bring it whenever you come. Traélo cuando vengas.

EXERCISE 6. Read the sentences and translate the words in parentheses.

1. Give the letter to (quien) opens the door.
2. Now that you're finish, you can buy (lo que quieras) you want.
3. I'll find my father (dondequiera) he is.
4. You'll have to take (el que) comes first.
5. (Cada vez que) I see her, I think of my mother.
6. (Sea quien sea) he is, he isn't my brother.
7. Come to see me (cuando) you are in Chicago.
8. my parents will give (me lo que) I ask for.
9. I think Martha is happy (dondequiera) she is.
10. We'll have to take (lo que) they give us.
11. (Quienquiera) he is, he's very polite.
12. I'll do (lo que) he says.
13. He'll write to me (dondequiera) I am.
14. Go with (quien) you want.
15. Visit your family (siempre que) you can.

EXERCISE 7. Fill the blanks with the correct translation of the Spanish in
parentheses.
1. He didn't want to sit down. (¿y tú?))
2. They had to be there before six. (¿y él?)
3. The children won't be able to come. (¿y tu papá?)
4. Henry would like two eggs. (¿y a ella?)
5. We used to drink warm milk. (¿y ella no?)
6. I can drive a car. (¿y tú?)
7. He likes to go riding. (¿y a Uds. no?)
8. She could name all the mountains. (¿y María?)
9. I'm going to go to the movies. (¿y tú?)
10. John wants to come to my house on Monday. (¿y Roberto?)

EXERCISE 8. Fill the blanks with the tense of the verb indicated that corresponds to
the past subjunctive in Spanish and translate.
(have) 1. If I that book, I'd lend it to you.
(be) 2. If that dog mine, I'd feed run better.
(win) 3. He said he'd pay me if he .
(listen) 4. They'd be able to hear if they.
(be able) 5. We'd help you if we.
(speak) 6. If he Spanish, you'd understand.
(find out) 7. If you the address, would you tell me?
(know) 8. If you how to speak Spanish, would you go to Mexico?
(be able) 9. He'd tell me where she lives if he find her address.
(go) 10. If you to the market, you'd be able to buy vegetables.
(be) 11. If he sick, he wouldn't go to the office.
(have) 12. Would you go to the movies with me if you coat?
(begin) 13. If they now, they'd get through before dinner.
(get up) 14. Henry would work if he earlier.
(own) 15. If we that house, we'd sell it.

LA FORMA CONCISA CON TOO y SO

El equivalente en inglés de tú también, él también, Alex también, etc. es una
oración corta compuesta del sujeto, el auxiliar que corresponda al tiempo empleado,
y la palabra TOO o SO. Nótese que las dos formas con TOO o SO se distinguen por
el orden de las palabras. Si se emplea una forma del verbo be en la oración,
también se empleará una forma del verbo be en la oración corta.
1. They're Mexican, and I am too. Son mexicanos, y yo también.
They're Mexican, and so am I.
2. Robert was sick, and Mary was too. Roberto estuvo enfermo, y María
Robert was sick, and so was Mary. también.
3. She saw that movie, and I did too. Ella vio esa película, y yo también.
She saw that movie, and so did I.
4. my parents have a car, and yours do Mis papás tienen un coche, y los suyos
too. también.
my parents have a car, and so do
yours.
5. John can come, and they can too. Juan puede venir, y ellos también.
John can come, and so can they.
6. He'll bring money, and Henry will Él traerá dinero, y Enrique también.
too.
He'll bring money, and so will Henry.
7. She'd like to go, and he would too. A ella le gustaría ir, y a él también.
She'd like to go, and so would he.
8. We should get up early, and she Deberíamos levantarnos temprano, y
should too. ella también.
We should get up early, and so should
she.

EXERCISE 9. Fill the blanks with the correct translation of the Spanish in
parentheses.
1. He's hungry, and (yo también)
2. They're coming, and (él también)
3. We were looking for Helen, and (mi papá también)
4. He can come tomorrow, and (Alice también)
5. Mexico City has many people, and (New York también)
6. my parents could understand it, and (los tuyos también)
7. They'll be ready by six o'clock, and (nosotros también)
8. We'll eat downtown this afternoon, and (Stella también)
9. you should speak harder, and (Ud. también)
10. We used to use his car, and (ellas también)
11. John and Robert have already eaten, and (María también)
12. They're always angry at me, and (su hermana también)
13. We bought a loaf of bread, and (Pablo también)
14. They should try to eat more, and (Ud. también)
15. We've told the children a story, and (mi mamá también)
16. They ran home, and (el perro también)
17. Her saint's day was yesterday, and (el mío también)
18. Her father will wake up at nine, and (su mamá también)
19. They used to get up later, and (él también)
20. We caught two rabbits, and (Alex también)
21. Omar learns very quickly, and (María también)
22. They've eaten two apples, and (nosotros también)
23. She got off on Madero, and (el muchacho también)
24. I ought to get off the bus, and (tú también)
25. Fred's sister got on the bus, and (Alberto también)

LA FORMA CONCISA CON EITHER y NEITHER

El equivalente en inglés de ni tú tampoco, ni él tampoco, ni Omar tampoco, etc. es
una oración corta en negativo compuesta del sujeto, el auxiliar que corresponda al
tiempo empleado, y la palabra either o neither. Nótese que las dos formas con
either y neither se distinguen por el orden de las palabras. Con either se empleará
un verbo en negativo, y con neither un verbo en afirmativo. Si se emplea una forma
del verbo be en la oración, también se empleará una forma del verbo be en la
oración corta.
1. They aren't Mexican, and I'm not Ellos no son mexicanos. Ni yo tampoco.
either.
They aren't Mexican, and neither am I.
2. Robert wasn't sick, and Mary wasn't Roberto no estuvo enfermo. Ni María
either. tampoco.
Robert wasn't sick, and neither was
Mary.
3. She didn't see that movie, and I Ella no vio esa película. Ni yo tampoco.
didn't either.
She didn't see that movie, and neither
did I.
4. my pa re nt s d on 't h a ve a ca r, an d his don't Mis papás no tienen un auto. Ni los
either. suyos tampoco.
my parents don't have a car, and
neither do his.
5. Fred can't come, and they can't Alfredo no puede venir. Ni ellos
either. tampoco.
Fred can't come, and neither can they.
6. He wo n 't b rin g an y mo n e y, a nd He nry w on' t Él no traerá dinero. Ni Enrique tampoco.
ei the r.
He wo n 't b rin g a n y mo ne y, an d ne i the r wi l l
He nry .
7. She wouldn't like to go, and he wouldn't A ella no le gustaría ir. Ni a él tampoco.
either.
She wouldn't like to go, and neither
would he.
8. We sh ou ld n 't ge t up e a rly, a nd s he No deberíamos levantarnos temprano.
shoul dn' t e i the r. Ni ella tampoco.
We shouldn't get up early, and neither
should she.

EXERCISE 10
Change these sentences in exercise 9. to the negative. Fill the blanks with the
negative forms of the Spanish in parentheses.

EXERCISE 11. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. They plan to go to the United States in September.
2. We planned to finish before morning.
3. He'll plan to see you next week.
4. She's planned to buy a new coat this winter.
5. I should plan to buy a house.
6. you'd plan to sell your car if you needed the money.
7. James was planning to visit me in October.
8. I planned to invite him to the party.
9. The Masons are planning to have dinner with us on Sunday.
10. We plan to make the dresses ourselves.

EXERCISE 12. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Do you plan to sell your car?
2. Did he plan to go out of town on Saturday?
3. Will they plan to capture the thief?
4. Have they planned to drive to Cuernavaca?
5. Should I plan to examine the house?
6. Would you plan to build an office?
7. Does the teacher plan to explain the lesson?
8. Is Miss Russel planning to correct the sentences?
9. Was Henry planning to be a doctor?
10. Did she plan to get married in June?

EXERCISE 13.
Translate into Spanish.
1. Will you get through before it gets dark?
2. We don't have any old clothes to give away.
3. Make him stop bothering me.
4. It seems to me that you should have kept the boys in the class from bothering the
girls.
5. If you had taken care of your cold, you wouldn't be sick now.
6. It's a long way from here to the market.
7. If you had a headache, would you go to work?
8. Warren always used to have an earache after going swimming.
9. I plan to be able to stop working when I'm sixty years old.
10. This suit doesn’t fit me anymore. I'm going to give it away.
11. Don't bother him when he's busy.
12. I plan to go to the movies if I get through before five-thirty.
13. It's a shame that he spent all his brother's money.
14. It's too bad that he didn't take care of his eyes.
15. I'll get you whatever you want.

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
invite live laugh (at) move jump like listen (to) need kill learn love notice kiss look
(at) last name knock (on) look (for) lift open

EXERCISE 15. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
find out go out get here, get away give go to sleep there, (to) get off give up go to
bed get sleepy get old go get get rich get ready go back get up get thirsty get wet
get married

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Expand the following verb practice to include all the tenses studied so far, including
the use of the past tense for the Spanish past subjunctive and the use of the past
perfect for the Spanish past perfect subjunctive. Be sure to include forms of the
verbs want, tell, ask, followed by an objective noun or pronoun.
1. They'll bother us 3. will they bother us? 5. Why won't they bother
us?
2. They won't bother us. 4. Won't they bother us?

EXERCISE 17. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs cook, boil, cost, throw, surprise, get
through, give (something) away. Expand each verb practice to include different
tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 18. Read and translate.

NAIL SOUP
A poor traveler, tired and hungry, stopped one evening, as it was getting dark, at the
door of a poor widow's house to see if he could get something to eat. In answer to
his knock the woman opened the door. "Excuse me for bothering you," began the
traveler, "but I've walked a long way today, and I'm very tired and hungry. Would it
be possible to eat a meal here and rest a while?" "There's nothing in the house to
eat," answered the woman. "As you can see, I'm a poor widow with no husband to
take care of me. I could hardly find enough food for my dinner today, and I certainly
have nothing to give to beggars. I think that I'll have to go to bed without my
supper." "That's too bad," said the stranger. "It's a pity that with so much food in the
world there isn't enough for us. However, I know how to make a soup that is very
cheap. In fact, it costs nothing. It's called nail soup." "Nail soup?" asked the woman
surprised. " "Yes, nail soup. All I need is a nail and a little water. The water, of
course, costs nothing; and I have a nail with me," said the traveler as he took one
out of his pocket. "If you'll let me use your fire to cook the soup," added the traveler,
I'll be glad to invite you to eat with me." The woman opened the door and let the
stranger in the kitchen. She watched him as he took a large pot from the wall, filled
it half full of water, and set it over the fire. Then he took a nail out of his pocket,
washed it carefully, and dropped it into the soup. "How long will it take the soup to
cook?" asked the woman. "It won’t take very long," replied the stranger. "As soon as
the water boils, it'll be ready to eat." "Really?" said the woman. "And will it be
good?" "Yes," answered the traveler, "it'll be good soup; however, it'd be better if I
had a little piece of meat to throw in the water with the nail." "I'll see if I can find a
little piece of meat," said the poor widow. "It seems to me that there was a little
piece left." She went to a shelf in the kitchen and came back with a fine piece of
meat. "Thank you," said the stranger, as he dropped the meat into the pot. "Now if I
had an onion-a very small one would be all right-and a few, potatoes”; "I believe I
have a small onion left, and I'll see if there are any potatoes. Oh, yes, and here are
some beans and some corn and a tomato." "Thank you," said the traveler as he
threw the vegetables into the pot. "Now if I had a little butter and some salt and
pepper and a few more vegetables" "Oh, there's plenty of butter," said the woman,
"and salt too, and there are more vegetables in the garden." "All we need now," said
the stranger, "is some milk and about a cup of cream." Soon the pot was boiling
over the fire. "The soup is ready to eat," said the stranger. "It smells very good,"
said the woman as she set the table. When supper was over and the stranger got
ready to leave, the widow said to him, "Thank you for inviting me to have supper
with you. Your nail soup was fine." "It's surprising what one can do with a nail, isn't
it?" said the stranger as he went out of the door.

EXERCISE 19. Write in English.

1. ¿Por qué le diste a ese conejo?
2. Ha hecho mucho frío este invierno.
3. ¿Sabe cocinar la hija del Sr. Mathew?
4. Pensamos estudiar español, ¿y tú?
5. Él no cree que hará demasiado frío para nadar. Ni yo tampoco.
6. Eres muy afortunado de que esos niños dejaran de molestarte.
7. Él no sabe manear un coche, pero yo sí.
8. Si yo estuviera en tu lugar, iría; y ellos también.
9. Elena compraría aquella falda si no costara tanto.
10. Si hubieras desayunado esta mañana, ahora no tendrías tanta hambre.

EXERCISE 20. Dictation.

1. Let's put all the pots on this shelf.
2. The iceman knocked on my door at six-fifteen this morning.
3. I told you to buy two tickets for me, didn't I?
4. My mother doesn't like tomato soup, and I don't either.
5. Don’t give those books away. You’ll need them some day.
6. you shouldn't kept strangers in your house.
7. They don't have a key to this door. Do you?
8. A thief got in my house last night and stole all the silver.
9. I don’t want you to give any more money to beggars.
10. It's too bad that your horse didn't win the race.

EXERCISE 21. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in
the negative. Notice that the infinitive without to is used after let, make, help .
1. Did she let the stranger come in the house?
2. Did she let him make any soup?
3. Will you help me move this heavy chair?
4. Will they help me find my book?
5. Do you make the children play in the house?
6. Does he make his wife work?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
7. Does he want you to come early?
8. Did she want you to get married?
9. Did you tell them to clean the house?
10. Will you tell her to help you?
11. If you had money, would you buy a car?
12. If the suit cost $20.00 (dollars), would you buy it?
13. If he was rich, would he work?
14. Would you go with me if you had time?
15. Would he marry her if he loved her?
16. Would you work if you needed money?
17. If he had had a car, would he have gone to the United States?
18. If you had worn your coat, would you have been cold?
19. If he had sold his house. would he have paid you?
20. If they had taken the train, would they have arrived on time?
21. Would she have washed the clothes if they had been dirty?
22. Would Victor have learned English if he had tried hard?
23. Would he have worn a coat if it had been cold?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative, using the
necessary pronoun as a subject and repeating the auxiliary used in the sentence,
24. I don't like peaches, do you?
25. We don’t have to get up early, Do they?
26. They work six days a week. Does he?
27. He can speak Spanish. Can she?
28. We live in the city, do you?
29. I got mad. Didn't you?
30. They've worked every day this week. Has he?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
31. Do you plan to go to Acapulco during your vacation?
32. Did you plan to buy a new dress for the party?
33. Do you plan to help us on Saturday?
34. Are you planning to see him again?
LESSON 15.
VOCABULARY.
1. to realize, realized,
Realizar. Dar 13. human Humano.
realzed
cuenta.
2. to test, tested, Probar. 14. nature Naturaleza.
tested
3. to fail, failed, Fallar. 15. universe Universe.
failed.
4. to cho o se , ch o se, Escoger. 16. jewel Joya.
ch o sen
5. to follow, followed, Seguir. jewelry Alhajas.
followed.
6. to fool, fooled, Engañar. 17. diamond Diamante.
fooled
7. wise Sabio. 18. toy Juguete.
wisdom Sabiduría. 19. bouquet Ramillete.
8. power Poder. 20. dew Rocío.
powerful Poderoso. 21. bee Abeja.
9. handsome Hermoso. 22. queen Reina.
10. straight Derecho. 23. sister-in-law Cuñada..
11. humble Humilde. 24. brother-in-law Cuñado.
12. artificial Artificial.

IDIOMS.
1. to get rid of deshacerse de How far is it to ¿Qué tan lejos es a
New York? Nueva York?
I want to get rid of Me quiero 5. Walk straight Camina derecho
my old car. deshacer de mi ahead. adelante.
viejo auto.
I can’t get rid of my No puedo 6. at midnight A medianoche.
cold deshacerme de mi
catarro.
2. to look alike Parecer. 7. soft drink Refresco.
They look alike. Ellos se parecen. 8. liquor Licor.
3. to go shopping Ir de compras. 9. Whose book is ¿De quién es este
this? libro?
4. how far? ¿Qué tan lejos? It’s mine. Es mío.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. instead of boiling.
2. before boiling .
3. in spite of boiling.
4. besides boiling.
5. What are you boiling the water for?
6. What did you boil the water for?
7. What are they shooting at?
8. What did they shoot at?
9. Who are you going to go with?
10. Who did you go with?
11. Who will you go with?
12. I don’t have to stay and he doesn’t either.
13. He has to play and I do too.
14. We don't have to take care of the children and you don't either.
l5. you have to take care of the children, and we do too.
16. He doesn’t want to go, but I do.
17. I want to go, but he doesn't.
18. It must be cold in December.
19. It probably isn’t cold in December.
20. Is it cold in December?

MAY. Puede. May not.

MIGHT. Podría. Might not.

Ejemplos:
1. He may come Él puede venir 3. It may rain Puede llover
tomorrow. mañana. soon. pronto.
He might come Él podría venir It might rain soon. Podría llover
tomorrow. mañana pronto.
2. We may not Podemos no 4. She may have Ella puede haber
work on Monday. trabajar el lunes. eaten. comido.
2. We might not Podríamos no 5. He said that Él dijo que Omar
work on Monday. trabajar el lunes. Omar might come. podría haber
comido.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. I may go at four o'clock. 8. She might not go without us.
2. I may not go at four o'clock. 9. We may go after eating.
3. you might go with them. 10. We may not go after eating.
4. you might not go with them. 11. you might go tomorrow.
5. He might go in the morning. 12. you might not go tomorrow.
6. He may not go in the morning. 13. They may have gone by plane.
7. She might go without us. 14. They may not have gone by plane.

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs sleep, drink, eat, play, be, sell, love,
forget, remember, using both auxiliaries may and might with each verb form.

PREGUNTAS INDIRECTAS
Empiezan con las palabras interrogativas which, when, where, what, why, how,
how much, how many, whose (de quién) . Ejemplos.
1. Where is he? (pregunta directa) 3. Whose is it? (pregunta directa).
don't you know where he is? (pregunta Have they found out whose it is?
indirecta) (pregunta indirecta)
2. What time is it? (pregunta directa) 4. Why didn't she come? (pregunta
directa)
Do you know what time it is? (pregunta I don't know why she didn't come.
indirecta) (pregunta indirecta)

EXERCISE 4. Translate the following sentences.

1. ¿Sabes dónde está (cosa)?
2. No sé quién es ese señor.
3. ¿No sabe él qué hora es?
4. No recuerdo por qué no vino él.
5. Ellos nos van a preguntar qué comimos.
6. ¿No te puede decir Enrique dónde están los muchachos?
7. Mi esposa no sabe por qué él no va a terminar.
8. ¿Sabes dónde está la Ciudad de México?
9. ¿Saben los muchachos cuántos se comió ella?
10. Ellos averiguarán por qué lo hicimos.

EXERCISE 5. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative,
using Yes, I know (knew); No, I don't (didn't) know
1. Do you know who those boys are?
2. Did you know when we arrived?
3. Do you know where the market is?
4. Did you know where we were?
5. Do you know what time it is?
6. Do you know what we mean?
7. Did you know where I lived?
8. Did you know who my teacher was?
9. Do you know how we found out?
10. Did they know why I went home?
11. Do you know whose it is?

LA FORMA CONCISA CON LA PARTICULA TO

En vez de repetir un verbo que se ha expresado anteriormente, se usa una forma
concisa que consiste en el empleo de la partícula to del verbo implícito. Esta forma
concisa se emplea mucho después de verbos want, like, need, have. Ejemplo:
He doesn't speak because he doesn't Él no estudia porque no le gusta.
like to.

EXERCISE 6. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. He told me to help him, but I didn't want to.
2. Fredy isn't going to speak, but he needs to.
3. We didn't work yesterday because we didn't have to.
4. Why doesn't she dance? Doesn't she like to?
5. The Smiths went to the movies because they wanted to.
6. I don't want to go. Do I have to?
7. They speak every day because they like to.
8. I went to see the doctor because I needed to.
9. I'll spend this money if I want to.
10. you can go downtown with us. Would you like to?

EXERCISE 7. Translate into English, using the short form with to.
1.A él le gustaría estudiar más inglés, pero no creo que lo necesite.
2. Podemos trabajar todo el sábado, pero no tenemos que hacerlo.
3. Que vaya con nosotros si él quiere.
4. Puedes ir con nosotros. ¿Quieres?
5. Ella siempre nos ayuda en la noche, pero no creo que le guste.
6. Puedes trabajar el domingo si quieres, pero no lo necesitas.
7. Fui a la escuela hoy porque el profesor me dio que tenía que ir.
8. El doctor le dijo a mi papá que podía tomar si quería.
9. Sus papás nunca han viajado. ¿Les gustaría?
10. Mi hermana sabe hablar inglés, pero no le gusta.

EXERCISE 8. Fill the blanks with the correct translation of the Spanish in
parentheses.
1. I won't be able to go to the meeting. (Ni el señor Foster tampoco)
2. We should tell the workers the truth, and (ellos también)
3. Martin would go to Betty's party if he knew her better, and (Bill también)
4. Mrs. Wood has been in Mexico many times, and (su hijo también)
5. He didn't test the car before he bought it. (Ni su amigo tampoco)
6. I don't want you to go downtown by yourself at night (Ni su mamá tampoco)
7. my father couldn't fix the stove. (Ni mi hermano tampoco)
8. My husband would like to visit Paris in the spring, and (a mi también)
9. Her teacher didn't tell her not to get married. (Ni su familia tampoco)
10. My sister has told you to bring the clothes on Tuesday, and (mi esposa también)

EXERCISE 9. Fill the blanks with the correct form of the verb indicated and
translate.
(want) 1. If I had that coat, would you have bought it for me?
(wait) 2. If she had five minutes more, would he have come?
(sing) 3. Would you have listened if she had that song?
(have) 4. He'd have gone if he'd time.
(go) 5. If he had with me, they'd have punished him.
(tell) 6. If they had me the truth, I'd have believed them.
(cost) 7. Would you have bought the hat if it had twenty dollars?
(work) 8. If he had all his life, he'd have money now.
(call) 9. She wouldn't be sick now if she'd the doctor sooner.
(be) 10. If you had old enough, would you have gone to school?

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. I want you to get rid of that dirty cat.
2. He got rid of his small house.
3. She can get rid of her cold.
4. They'll get rid of the chickens that don't lay eggs.
5. Mr. Forest should get rid of all those old papers.
6. you have to get rid of your old radio before buying a new one.
7. Mr. Jones ought to get rid of the flowers.
8. We must get rid of all this food before we leave.
9. I know how to get rid of a headache.
10. The teacher told him to get rid of his books.
EXERCISE 11. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Did you get rid of that mouse in the kitchen?
2. Does she get rid of her old clothes?
3. Will she be able to get rid of her car?
4. Did he get rid of his stomachache?
5. Are you going to get rid of all your tickets?
6. Is he getting rid of his farm?
7. Did you tell me to get rid of my old letters?
8. Should they get rid of that fruit?
9. Haven't you got rid of your earache yet?
10. Was she going to get rid of her business?

EXERCISE12. Translate into Spanish.

1. I didn't want to go, but I had to.
2. We want to get rid of everything we don't need before we leave.
3. Those two boys look so much alike I thought they must be brothers.
4. She wanted me to go shopping with her, but I told her I didn’t want to.
5. Go straight ahead until you get to the market. Then turn to the right,
6. you can't buy hard liquor in some places in the United States.
7. The party was over before midnight.
8. Would you like coffee, tea, or a soft drink with your meal?
9. how can I get rid of this toothache?
10. Why don't you make him stop giving away those tickets?
11. Can't you make Ruth go shopping with me?
12. We plan to keep her from getting married until she's nineteen.
13. I want to get rid of my car because it's so expensive.
14. If your stomachache isn’t better in the morning, the doctor should be called.
15. It seems to me that you should have come to home once in a while.

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
own practice pull rest pass pronounce punish remember pick out play reply return
pick up prefer reach realize place push rain shout (at)

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
get drunk get in get dark hang get sick get out get hurt hide get scared get lost get
rid of hurt get better get tired have hit get worse get light hear keep

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice Expand the following. verb practice to include different
tenses.
1. They'd realize that you're right.
2. They wouldn't realize that you're right.
3. Would they realize that you're right?
4. Wouldn't they realize that you're right?
5. Why wouldn't they realize that you're right?

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs test, fail, choose, follow, fool, look
alike, go shopping, get rid of. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses,
as in the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the
interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCSE 17. Read and translate.

THE WISDOM OF SOLOMON
Long ago there was a very wise and powerful king named Solomon and a very
beautiful queen called the Queen of Sheba (Saba). The Queen of Sheba heard of
the wisdom of Solomon, and she traveled from her own country to his to ask him
questions. When they met, it was like the meeting of the sun and the moon because
she was as beautiful as he was handsome. He was followed by the most handsome
men of his country, and she was followed by the most beautiful women of her
country. These beautiful and handsome young men and women were like the stars
around the sun and moon.
The Queen of Sheba brought a huge treasure with her of gold and silver and jewels-
rich presents that shone as bright as the sun. She brought a bird made of gold that
could fly and sing and many things;
that you could not believe had been made by human hands. "Powerful Solomon,
wisest of all men," said the Queen of Sheba, "I am only a queen from a small and
humble country, but I have brought you some small toys to play with." As she spoke,
one of her slaves placed two beautiful bouquets that looked exactly alike on the
table. "One of these bouquets," explained the queen, "was made by nature;
and the other was made by human hands. If you can tell me which bouquet is real
and which is artificial, all the treasure that I have brought with me will be yours."
Now King Solomon knew that this was not a game. The Queen of Sheba was testing
his wisdom. If he failed, he would be laughed at by all the people of his country; and
they would no longer believe that he was the wisest man in the world. King Solomon
looked at the bouquets. They were so much alike "One has dew on it. That must be
the real one," thought King Solomon to himself. Then he noticed that the other
bouquet also had dew on it. He saw a dead leaf on one and was about (estuvo a
punto) to choose that one when he saw that the other one also had a dead leaf on it
in the same place. Then King Solomon heard the bees in the garden outside the
window, and he had an idea. "Open the window ," he told the slave.
The slave opened the window, and the bees came into the room. The. bees went
straight as an arrow to the real bouquet of flowers. Diamonds, jewels, and gold
couldn't fool them. The Queen of Sheba then realized that Solomon was really wise.
If you want to understand the strange things of the universe, you must let nature be
your teacher.

EXERCISE 18. Write in English.

1. ¿Sabe Ud. cómo se llama ese muchacho?
2. Nunca he viajado en avión, pero me gustaría.
3. Él siempre está bromeando.
4. Estos son los árboles más rectos que he visto.
5. No siempre podemos entender la naturaleza humana.
6. ¿Sabe ella quién es la reina de Inglaterra?
7. He tenido este catarro dos semanas, y no se me puede quitar.
8. ¿Me pueden decir qué hora es?
9. Puede que tú engañes a mi hermano, pero a mí no me puedes engañar.
10. Puede que ella consiga a alguien que sepa cuidar a los niños.

EXERCISE 19. Dictation.

1. Do your brothers look alike?
2. If you’ll follow me, I’ll show you where the market is.
3. Did you know who I was?
4. I don't know how you got rid of all that money so fast.
5. She went shopping and bought some toys for the children's birthday.
6. It might rain today if the wind doesn't stop blowing.
7. If it wasn’t so cold, I might go with you.
8. He may know where the money is.
9. We couldn’t buy the jewels ourselves, and he couldn’t either.
10. The most beautiful diamonds were found in Africa.

EXERCISE 20.
Conversation Answer the following questions. '
1. how far is it from here to the market?
2. how far is it from here to the movies?
3. how far is it to Acapulco?
4. how far is it to your house?
5. how far is it to the mountains?
Answer the following questions, using the necessary pronoun as a subject and
repeating the auxiliary in the sentence.
6. That man is handsome, isn't he?
7. Diamonds are expensive, aren't they?
8. I don't wear jewelry. Does she?
9. We don't want to come tomorrow, do you?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
10. Do you know where he is?
11. Do you know where he went?'
12. Do you know what time it is?
13. Did you know where they were?
14. Do you know who he lives with?
15. Did you tell her where you live?
16. Do you know who I am?
17. Do you know how he came?
18. Did you know who I was?
19. Did you know how much it cost?
20. Does he know what this is?
21. Did he know whose it was?
22. Will you tell me where they are?
23. Will you tell me how they went?
24. Can you tell me when pay day is?
25. Did you go before eating?
26. Did he leave without saying good-bye?
27. will she come in spite of being sick?
28. Will you tell Mary instead of telling Sofia?
29. Is she going to speak instead of resting?
30. Will you help me before going shopping?

LESSON 16.
VOCABULARY.

1. to smoke, smoked, Fumar. 16. dishes Platos.

smoked Humear.
2. to count, counted, Contar. 17. mail Correo.
counted
3. to bury, buried, buried enterrar mailman Cartero.
4. to d isco ve r, d isco ve red , Descubrir. 18. relative Pariente.
d isco ve red
5. to breathe, breathed, Respirar. 19. nephew Sobrino.
breathed
6. to prepare, prepared, Preparar. 20. niece Sobrina.
prepared
7. recently Recientemente. 21. New Year's año nuevo
8. slim Delgado. New Year's Day El día de año
nuevo.
9. interest Interés. New Year's Eve Víspera de Año
Nuevo.
10. amount Cantidad. 22. Easter Domingo de
Sunday resurrección
11. advice Consejo. Easter Week Semana santa.
12. bottom Fondo. Holy Week Semana santa.
13. wood Madera. 23. Halloween Noche de brujas.
14. bank Banco. Thanksgiving Día de acción de
Day gracias.
15. furniture Muebles. Christmas Eve Víspera de
Navidad.
A piece of furniture Un mueble. 25. Christmas Navidad
IDIOMS.
1. to be worth Valer. 4 . t o d ra w, d re w, d ra wn Ganar intereses.
in te re st
How much is it ¿Cuánto vale? 5. Whose fault is it? ¿De quién es la
worth? culpa?
It's worth one hundred Vale cien It's my fault. Es mi culpa.
dollars.
dólares.
to be worth it Valer la pena. It was my fault. Fue mi culpa.
It isn't worth it. No vale la 6. without fail Sin falta.
pena.
He isn't worth it. Él no vale la 7. I hope so. Espero que sí.
pena.
l: to be worth + Valer la pena + I hope not. Espero que no.
(gerund) (infinitivo).
It's worth reading. Vale la pena 8. after all Después de todo.
leer.
It isn't worth No vale la 9. Be careful. Ten cuidado.
seeing. pena ver.
2. to run away Huir. 10. to dig up Desenterrar.
3. to change your Cambiar de
mind idea.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. I may sleep this afternoon.
2. I may not sleep this afternoon.
3. I might sleep in this room.
4. I might not sleep in this room.
5. I'm going to go, but they aren't.
6. I went, but they didn't.
7. I've gone, but they haven't.
8. I'll go, but they won't.
9. I work every day, do you?
10. I worked yesterday, did you?
11. I'm going to work tomorrow, are you?
12. I've worked every day, have you?
13. I'll work tomorrow, will you?
14. I can go, and he can too.
15. I can't go, and he can't either.
16. I want to go, and he does too.
17. I don't want to go, and he doesn't either.
18. I'll be hungry before noon.
19. I won't be hungry before noon.
20. I might be hungry before noon.

Maybe. Tal vez. Perhaps. Quizá.

Maybe y perhaps generalmente se colocan al principio de la oración. Irán seguidos
por el futuro en inglés cuando la oración en español implique este mismo tiempo.
1. Maybe he's sick. Tal vez él esté 3. Maybe she hasn't Tal vez ella no ha
enfermo. left. salido.
Perhaps he's sick. Quizás él esté Perhaps she hasn't Quizás ella no ha
enfermo. left. salido.
2. Maybe he didn't Tal vez él no fue. 4. Maybe they’ll work Tal vez ellos trabajarán
tomorrow. mañana.
go.
Perhaps he didn't Quizás él no fue. Perhaps they’ll work Quizás ellos trabajarán
tomorrow. mañana.
go.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. Maybe I’ll go in the morning.
2. Maybe I won't go in the morning.
3. Perhaps I go in the morning.
4. Perhaps I won't go in the morning.
5. Maybe he went yesterday.
6. Maybe he didn't go yesterday.
7. Perhaps he has already gone.
8. Perhaps he hasn't gone yet.
9. Maybe I'd go with them.
10. Maybe I wouldn't go with them.
11. Perhaps I should go too.
12. Perhaps I shouldn't go either.
13. Maybe I'm going to go with you.
14. Maybe I'm not going to go with you.
15. Perhaps I can go early.
16. Perhaps I can't go early.
17. Maybe he could go.
18. Maybe he couldn't go either.

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs decide, boil, cook, appear, agree,
follow, find out, name, realize. Expand each verb practice to include different
tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb.
Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 4.
Translate the following sentences. Change them to possibility (affirmative and
negative) four different ways, using may, might, maybe, perhaps. Translate each
time. Remember to use the future after maybe and I perhaps when the future is
implied.
1. John sleeps in that big bed.
2. The teacher explains each lesson.
3. He's dictated the sentences to the class.
4. She looks good in green.
5. They play football on Saturday.
6. His wife chooses his ties.
7. They've written to him.
8. They give it to me themselves.
9. He's kept his money in the bank.
10. She's in school.

EXERCISE 5.
Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative.
1. you know what time it is.
2. He remembers where I live.
3. They can tell you when she left.
4. She wants to tell us who she is.
5. We know who they are.
6. you remember what his name is.
7. They always ask me where it is.
8. I know where we are.
9. They remember where you were.
10. She knows who he is.

EXERCISE 6.
Fill the blanks with the correct translation of the Spanish in parentheses.
1. I can't stay (Ni él tampoco
2. I can stay, and (él también)
3. He doesn't have to work tomorrow (Ni yo tampoco)
4. He has to work tomorrow, and (yo tamblén)
5. They won't be at the party (Ni nosotros tampoco)
6. They'll be at the party, and (nosotros también)
7. you didn't go to the movies (Ni él tampoco)
8. you went to the movies, and (ella también)
9. We don't want to speak Spanish (Ni él tampoco)
10. We want to speak Spanish, and (él también)

EXERCISE 7.
Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative, interrogative, and
interrogative negative.
1. This furniture is worth a lot of money.
2. My house was worth a great deal.
3. His car is worth a thousand dollars.
4. My clothes are worth more than yours.
5. It’ll be worth something in a few years.
6. She's worth it.
7. That movie was worth seeing.
8. Television is worth watching.
9. Those vegetables are worth buying.
10. This lesson is worth speaking.
EXERCISE 8. Answer the following questions, using It's worth about
1. how much is a large diamond worth?
2. how much is a new car worth?
3. how much is this book worth?
4. how much is a peso worth in American money?
5. how much is a dollar worth in Mexican money?
6. how much is this land worth?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
7. Is Acapulco worth visiting?
8. Are those tomatoes worth buying?
9. Are these old papers worth keeping?
10. Are these old clothes worth saving?

EXERCISE 9. Translate into Spanish.

1. These old letters aren’t worth anything.
2. I planned to speak English last year, but then I decided it wasn't worth it.
3. Women have a right to change their minds.
4. you said you'd be there at ten o'clock.
5. If we don't get there on time, it'll be your fault.
6. how far is Monterrey from Mexico City?
7. My money isn't drawing any interest at all. Is yours?
8. Be careful. A car is coming.
9. We've decided to spend Christmas Day with the Martins after all.
10. Won't you be able to keep him from running away?
11. I'll take care of the children on New Year's Eve, but you'll have to take care of
them on New Year's Day.
12. They plan to go to Acapulco during Easter Week.
13. Why don't you stop giving away your money?
14. We must get rid of this old furniture before our relatives come.
15. I've changed my mind about going shopping with you.

EXERCISE 10. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Tie. Turn off. Seem. Spill. Turn. Try. Smell. Save. Touch. Translate. Surprise. Stay.
Test. Turn. Over. Talk. Smile (at). Use. Travel. Turn on. Satisfy.

EXERCISE 11. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Leave. Lend. Pay. See. Lie (down). Make. Read. Speak. Lose. Meet. Run. Sit
(down). Let. Put. Ride. Sleep. Lay eggs. Put on. Say. Sell.
EXERCISE 12. Verb Practice.
Expand the following verb practice to include different tenses.
1. My brother-in-law would smoke, wouldn't he?
2. My brother-in-law wouldn't smoke, would he?
3. Would my brother-in-law smoke?
4. Wouldn't my brother-in-law smoke?
5. When would my brother-in-law smoke?

EXERCISE 13. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs bury , discover, breathe, count,
prepare, run away, change your mind, draw interest, dig up. Expand each verb
practice to include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use the interrogative
words when it is possible.

EXERCISE14. Read and translate.

THE BLIND MAN WHO COULD SEE
A blind man who had a little money decided to bury it in the garden behind his
house, where he thought it would be safe from thieves. He digs up the money once
in a while to count it and to add his savings to it. One day a neighbor who used to
watch the blind man at work in his garden realized that he was burying money there;
so, the neighbor went into the garden one night, dug up the money, and took it home
with him. When the blind man discovered that his money had been stolen, he,
thought, perhaps, that his neighbor might be the thief; and he began to think of a
way to get the money back. The blind man went to his neighbor and said to him,
"I've saved a little money, but it isn't drawing any interest. Recently a relative of me
let me a large amount of money, and I want to ask your advice, about what I should
do with it. Should I keep all the money here with, me, or should I take all that I have
saved and put it in a safe place? I was planning to put it in a bank, where it would
draw a little interest." "A bank would be the worst place you could put it," answered
the neighbor. "You'd be in danger of losing everything you have. My advice would be
for you to keep your money here with you." "Maybe you're right," said the blind man.
"I'll do as you say." As soon as the blind man left, the neighbor hurried to the
garden to bury the money in the place where he had found it because he didn’t want
the blind man to find out that the money had been gone. Then he went back to his
house to wait until the blind man had buried all the money together so he could dig
it up and have it all. As soon as the blind man was sure that the money had been
returned, he went into the garden and dug it up. Then he went to his neighbor and
said to him, "I've changed my mind and have decided to put my money in the bank
after all, now that I have it together again. Don't you think that blind men can
sometimes see better than those who have eyes?"

EXERCISE 15. Write in English.

1. Cuando llegué a casa, descubrí que se me había olvidado la llave y no pude
entrar.
2. ¿Ha llegado ya la correspondencia? No, todavía no.
3. Habrá una fiesta la víspera de Todos los Santos, el treinta y uno de octubre.
4. Avísame si cambias de idea.
5. Tengo catarro y apenas puedo respirar.
6. ¿Te dijo el doctor que dejaras de fumar?
7. ¿Qué tan lejos puedes tirar esta piedra?
8. Todos mis amigos van a nadar pasado mañana, pero yo no quiero.
9. ¿No recuerdas cómo me llamo?
10. Tal vez se sientan mejor mañana.

EXERCISE 16. Dictation.

1. you don't have to listen to my advice if you don't want to.
2. Wood is more expensive now than it was last year.
3. I'm going to put my money in the bank, so it'll draw interest.
4. She's slimmer now than she was before she got sick.
5. They aren’t going to prepare a Christmas dinner, and I'm not either.
6. It isn't my fault if you can't make any more money.
7. These two dresses look alike.
8. I don't know who the tallest boy in the classes.
9. Instead of going to the movies, I'm going shopping.
10. Maybe he forgot to pay you.

EXERCISE 17. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. how far is it from Mexico City to Acapulco?
2. how far is it from the hotel to the bank?
3. how far is it from my house to your house?
4. how far is it from New York to Europe by ship?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
5. Do you know how far it is from downtown to your house?
6. Do you know how far it is from New York to Chicago?
7. Do you know how far it is from the market to my house?
8. Do you know how far it is from here to school?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative, using the
necessary pronoun and repeating the auxiliary.
9. It's late, isn't it?
10. He came early, didn’t he?
11. She changed her mind, didn't she?
12. You've met him, haven’t you?
Answer the following questions, using ago
13. how long ago did you meet your husband?
14. how long ago did you live in the United States?
15. how long ago did you speak English?
16. how long ago did you go to Europe?
17. how long ago did you get married? '
18. how long ago did you see him?
19. how long ago did you buy your car?
20. how long ago did you sell your house?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
21. Is that movie worth seeing?
22. Is this furniture worth selling?
23. Is that book worth reading?
f24. Is it worth it?
25. Is it worth anything?
26. Is the bathing suit worth buying?
27. Do you know who that man is?
28. Do you know what that man's name is?
29. Do you know who the richest man in the world is?
30. Do you know what my sister's name is?
31. Do you know where my brother is?
32. Do you know where my husband went?
33. Do you know who my wife went with?
34. Do you know where we are?
35. Do you know what time it is?

LESSON 17.
VOCABULARY.
1. to express, expresar 11. brokenhearted corazón roto
expressed,
expressed.
2. to repeat, repetir 12. talkative Hablador.
repeated repeated
3. to suffer, sufrir 13. pale pálido
suffered, suffered
4. to draw, drew, dibujar 15. bill cuenta; billete;
drawn pico
14. delicate delicado 16. hill colina
5. to rent, rente, rentar 17. person persona
rented
6. to burn, burned, quemar 18. goddess diosa
burned
7. fortunate afortunado 19. chocolate chocolate
fortunately afortunadamente 20. lip labio
unfortunately Desafortunadamente 21. tongue lengua

8. constant constante 22. storm Tormenta.

constantly constantemente 23. insect insecto
9. quiet. callado 24. army ejército
10. conceited Engreído. 25. navy marina

IDIOMS.
1. would rather + (infinitive without to) preferir + (infinitivo) que
than
Frank would rather play than speak. Frank preferiría jugar que hablar.
2. to die down calmar
3. to take (something) away (from) quitar (algo)
He took the book away from her. Él le quitó el libro a ella.
They took the furniture away. Se llevaron los muebles.
4. to fall in love (with) enamorarse (de)
to be in love (with) estar enamorado (de)
5. to insist on + (gerund) insistir en + (infinitivo)
He insisted on going. El insistió en ir.
6. It doesn’t do any good . No sirve de nada.
It didn’t do any good. No sirvió de nada.
7. from then on desde entonces
8. over and over una y otra vez
He said it over and over. Él lo dio una y otra vez.
9. on purpose a propósito
10. How often? ¿Qué tan a menudo?
How often do you go? ¿Qué tan a menudo vas?
11. once a week una vez a la semana
twice a week dos veces a la semana
three times a week tres veces a la semana
EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.
1. Maybe they live on this street.
2. Maybe they don't live on this street.
3. They might live at this number.
4. They might not live at this number.
5. Perhaps they live in that apartment.
6. Perhaps they don't live in that apartment.
7. He smokes, but she doesn't.
8. She doesn't smoke, but he does.
9. We'll have time, but they won't.
10. They won't have time, but we will.
11. I smoke, do you?
12. I used to smoke, did you?
13. I like to smoke, do you?
14. I smoke, and he does too.
15. I don't smoke, and he doesn't either
16. We're smoking, and she is too.
17. We aren't smoking, and she isn't either.
18. I've been hungry since noon.
19. I'd been hungry all morning.
20. He should be hungry by this time

TO HOPE y TO EXPECT
Speak the following infinitives and sentences.
to hope esperar (esperanza)
1. I hope my son will be a doctor. Espero que mi hijo sea doctor.
2. We hope you get better before the Esperamos que te mejores antes de la
party. fiesta.
3. John hopes to get rich in two years. Juan espera hacerse rico en dos años.
to expect esperar (expectativa)
Expect is often followed by an objective noun or pronoun and an infinitive with to.
1. I didn’t expect so many people at the No esperaba a tanta gente en la fiesta.
party.
2. You're early. We didn't expect you Llegaste temprano. No te esperábamos tan
so soon. pronto.
3. He expects to buy a new car next Él espera comprar un coche nuevo el
year. siguiente año.
4. I expect you to do your homework Espero que hagas tu tarea todos los
every day. días.

EXERCISE 2. Fill the banks with forms of the verbs hope or expect, as required,
and Translate.
1. We're paying you well; therefore, we'll good work.
2. He's already late. I him ten minutes ago.
3. We you can visit us at Christmas time.
4. I you have a happy New Year.
5. They me to get up early and help them.
6. He her to do her work.
7. I it stops raining before the party.
8. They a letter from her today.
9. The children their dog doesn't die.
10. We to go to the movies tonight. I it doesn't rain.

EXERCISE 3. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. We expected you on Wednesday.
2. They should expect her to do better work.
3. I expect you to wash the windows every day.
4. He'll expect too much.
5. you can expect an expensive present this year.
6. She has expected money from her family.
7. We're expecting a long vacation this month.
8. They were expecting her to come yesterday.
9. He expects to make more money next year.
10. They'd expect you to take them if it was raining.

LA EXPRESIÓN DE DESEO CON HOPE

Practice reading aloud the following sentences in English.
1. I hope you have a nice vacation. Espero que tengas agradables
vacaciones.
2. I hope you'll be very happy. Espero que serás muy feliz.
3. I hope you get well soon. Espero que te mejores pronto.
4. I hope it doesn't rain tomorrow. Espero que no llueva mañana.
5. I hope you have a happy birthday. Espero que tengas un feliz cumpleaños.
6. I hope you didn't get hurt. Espero que no te lastimaste.

EXERCISE 4. Translate the following sentences.

1. I hope he doesn't get sick.
2. I hope you have many children.
3. I hope it rains soon.
4. I hope the news will be better tomorrow.
5. I hope he tells the truth.

I hope he's here. Espero él esté aquí.

I hope he comes Espero él venga.
I hope he will come Espero el vendrá.
I hope he eats. Espero él coma.
I hope he will eat. Espero el comerá.
I wish it wouldn't rain. Desearía que no lloviera.
I wish I was rich. Desearía que yo fuera rico.
I wish he was here. Desearía que él estuviera aquí.
I wish he had money. Desearía que él tuviera dinero.
I wish he could come. Desearía que él pudiera venir.
I wish he had come. Desearía que él hubiera venido.
I wish he he'd come. Desearía que él viniera.

LA EXPRESIÓN DE DESEO CON WISH.

Las formas del verbo wish (desear) expresan deseo en inglés.
1. I wish it would rain 1. Desearía que lloviera
2. Don't you wish it would rain? 2. ¿No desearías que lloviera?
3. I wish I was thinner. 3. Desearía que yo fuera más delgado.
4. Don't you wish you were thinner? 4. ¿No desearías que fueras más
delgado?
5. I wish I could swim well. 5. Desearía poder nadar bien.
6. Don't you wish you could swim well? 6. ¿No deseas que pudieras nadar bien?

EXERCISE 5. Answer the following questions in the affirmative.

1. Don't you wish the wind would stop blowing?
2. Do you wish they'd stop singing?
3. Don't you wish they'd speak more?
4. Don't you wish she'd come tomorrow?
5. Don't you wish you could ride a horse?
6. Do you wish you could swim?
7. Do you wish you could speak Spanish?
8. Don't you wish you were younger?
9. Do you wish you were in Mexico?
10. Do you wish you were older?
11. Don't you wish we were at home?
12. Don't you wish it was true?

EXERCISE 6. Translate the following sentences. Change them to possibility

(affirmative and negative) four different ways, using may, might, maybe, perhaps .
Translate each time.
1. They speak English in that store.
2. We eat early on Sunday.
3. He's gone home for dinner.
4. She stays with her cousin during the summer.
5. They live in Mexico City.
6. They've eaten everything.
7. We have fun in the park.
8. He's sick.
9. They go to the zoo every day.
10. She's studied English in the United States.

EXERCISE 7. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. He'd rather go to the movies than to a posada.
2. They'd rather live in Mexico than in the United States.
3. You'd rather work on Saturday than on Sunday.
4. She'd rather speak English than Spanish.
5. John would rather marry Alice than Ane.
6. The children would rather visit their grandíather than their uncle.
7. My mother would rather travel by train than by plane.
8. Mrs. Rogers would rather teach Spanish than English.
9. My husband would rather eat than sleep.
10. The neighbors would rather have a new car than a vacation.

EXERCISE 8. Answer the following questions.

1. Would you rather play canasta or read?
2. Would you rather go to Cuernavaca or Taxco?
3. Would you rather have cake or fruit?
4. Would you rather have milk or water?
5. Would you rather have tea or coffee?
6. Would you rather come on Tuesday or on Thursday?
7. Would you rather live in Chicago or New York?
8. Would you rather speak English or Spanish?
9. Would you rather speak Spanish or English?
10. Would you rather be early or late?

EXERCISE 9. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. The wind died down before midnight.
2. The noise died down after a while.
3. The fire died down the next day.
4. The storm died down on Monday.
5. The wind Will die down soon.
6. The noise Will die down in a few hours.
7. The fire Will die down before morning.
8. The storm Will die down about noon.
9. The wind has died down .
10. The noise has died down .
11. The fire has died down .
12. The storm has died down .

EXERCISE 10. Translate into Spanish.

1. Would you rather be rich or poor?
2. The fire died down before dinner was over.
3. We couldn't make the payments on the television, so they came over and took it
away.
4. He fell in love with a woman much older than he.
5. I’m going to insist on correct pronunciation.
6. The teachers tell them to speak, but it doen't do any good.
7. It rained every day from then on.
8. You'll have to repeat these verbs over and over if you expect to learn them well.
9. I hope you haven't been sick.
10. They pushed that old man into the water on purpose.
11. how long ago did you see your oldest son?
12. Take care of the dog and don't let him run away.
13. I planned to go shopping this morning, but I can't go until the storm dies down.
14. What did you give those shirts away for?
15. I wish you'd stop bothering me.

EXERCISE 11. Give the past tense and participle of the following verbs.
Visit. Want. Answer. Avoid. Work. Watch. Arrive (in, at). Believe. Wash. Worry
(about). Add. Bother. Wait (for). Wish. Agree. Boil. Walk. Ask. Appear. Bury.
EXERCISE 12. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Stand up. Take. Take care of. Wake up. Set. Teach. Throw. Wear. Sing. Tell. Take
(something) away. Win. Swim. Think (about). Wear out. Shoot. Take off.
Understand. Be. Write. Be able.

EXERCISE 13. Verb Practice Expand the following verb practice to include different
tenses.
1. This wood should burn better.
2. This wood shouldn't burn better.
3. Should this wood burn better?
4. Shouldn't this wood burn better?
5. Why shouldn't this wood burn better?

EXERCISE 14. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs repeat, suffer, draw, express, rent,
take (something) away, insist on, fall in love (with), be in love (with). Expand each
verb practice to include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different
noun or pronoun, with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 15. Read and Translate.

THE HISTORY OF ECHO
Echo was a very talkative person who lived in the woods and hills, where she often
went hunting with her friend Diana, goddess of the hunt. As the two walked through
the woods and hunted together, Echo talked constantly. She was never quiet a
minute. When she could think of nothing else to say, she repeated the songs of the
birds and the noises that the animals made. At last another goddess got so tired of
listening to so much talk, perhaps because she never got a chance to say anything
herself, that she took away Echo's voice except for the purpose of reply. The loss of
her voice made Echo very sad, because she had fallen in love with a conceited
young man who always liked to hear nice things about himself; and Echo found it
impossible to express her love for him except by repeating everything he said. And
what he said, unfortunately, didn't always express her feelings for him. After a while
Echo's lover also began to get tired of hearing her repeat everything he said. He
told her to stop talking, but it didn't do any good. Instead, he only heard his own
words repeated again and again. Finally, he shouted at her, "I'd rather die than be
your lover. Poor Echo was brokenhearted, but she could only repeat over and over,
"I'd rather die than be your lover. I'd rather die than be your lover.". From then on,
she lived in the caves and in the mountains and suffered for her lost lover until she
became so thin and pale that finally there was nothing left of her but her voice. And
wherever you go, you can hear her repeating stupidly everything she hears,
because, like a woman, Echo still insists on having the last word.

EXERCISE 16. Write in English.

1. Espero que hayas traído bastante comida para todos.
2. Ellos dieron que preferían tomar café que chocolate.
3. Espero a José a las ocho. Espero que venga.
4. Creo que lo hizo a propósito.
5. Puede ser que se acabe el ruido poco a poco.
6. Él me dijo que dejara de trabajar a medianoche, pero yo no quería.
7. ¿Quién se llevó mis libros?
8. Ojalá que siempre estés tan feliz como estás ahora.
9. Puede que el Sr. Adams sepa dónde está Enrique.
10. ¿Sabes dónde está la montaña más alta del mundo?

EXERCISE 17. Dictation.

1. I told him to stop working so hard, but I don't think it did any good.
2. He's a very conceited person.
3. Maybe he was sick. He looks so pale.
4. We rented a house in Acapulco, where we'll spend our vacation.
5. Unfortunately, there may not be enough presents for all the children.
6. Tell them not to burn those newspapers until I read them.
7. how long ago did you put your money in the bank?
8. how far is it from here to Europe?
9. I'd rather be a doctor than a teacher.
10. We didn't expect a present from the pupils.

EXERCISE 18. Conversation Answer the following questions.

1. how often do you go to class? 9. how long ago did you buy your car?
2. how often do you go to the movies? 10. how long ago did you sell your
house?
3. how often do you go to the United 11. how long ago did you pay your bill?
States?
4. how often do you get a vacation? 12. how long go did you meet him?
5. how often do you see your parents? 13. how far is it from here to the
movies?
6. how often do you have a party? 14. how far is it from here to the
market?
7. how often do you write to him? 15. how far is it from here to Taxco?
8. how often do you go out of town?

Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.

16. Does the fire die down every night?
17. Did the wind die down yesterday?
18. Will the storm die down before the party?
19. Has the noise died down?
20. the fire was going to die down?
21. Is the fire dying down?
22. Do you wish you were a movie star?
23. Do you wish you were in Acapulco?
24. Do you wish you were twenty years old?
25. Do you wish you were a child again?
26. Did he insist on leaving?
27. Did she insist on coming?
28. Did they insist on talking?
29. Did he insist on helping you?
Answer the following questions.
30. Would you rather be old or young?
31. Would you rather be rich or poor?
32. Would you rather be here or at home?
33. Would you rather be rich or beautiful?
34. Would you rather be a teacher or a doctor?

LESSON 18.
VOCABULARY.
1. to cross, crossed, Cruzar. 15.jail cárcel
crossed
2. to freeze, froze, congelar prison prisión
frozen
3. to paint, painted, pintar prisoner prisionero
painted
4. to attack, attacked, atacar 16. canoe canoa
attacked
5. to wrap, wrapped, envolver boat bote
wrapped
6. to sound, sounded, Sonar. row boat bote de remos
sounded
7. special especial 17. history historia
especially especialmente 18. sled Trineo.
8. although aunque 19. blanket manta
though aunque 20. sheet hoja
9. marvelous maravilloso 21. pillow almohada
10. courage coraje 22. berry mora
11. patience paciencia 23. church iglesia
12. sympathy simpatía 24. savage salvaje
13. part Parte. 25. Indian Indio.
14. group grupo 26. French francés
France Francia

IDIOMS.
1. to pay attention to poner atención
Don't pay any attention to him. No le pongas atención a él.
2. to stand in line parar en fila
3. to go on + (gerund) seguir + (gerundio)
He went on eating. Él siguió comiendo.
4. to make a mistake cometer un error
5. to wrap up envolver
6. by the time Para la hora.
It was raining by the time we left. Estaba lloviendo para la hora que
salimos
7. Shut up. Cállate
Be quiet. Cállate
8. Keep quiet. Cállate
I kept quiet. Me callé
19. how long has it been since you ¿Cuánto tiempo hace desde que lo
saw him? viste?
It's been about two months. Han sido como dos meses.
It's been two months since I saw him Hace dos meses desde que lo ví.

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following phrases and sentences and practice reading
them.
1. He might live in a hotel.
2. He might not live in a hotel.
3. Maybe he lives in Cuernavaca.
4. Maybe he doesn't live in Cuernavaca.
5. He may live with the Smith family.
6. He may not live with the Smith family.
7. before choosing
8. after choosing
9. without choosing.
10. besides choosing.
11. instead of choosing
12. in spite of choosing
13. Choose this one.
14. Don't choose that one.
15. Let's choose this one.
16. I can win, and he can too.
17. it can't win, and he can't either.
18. Perhaps they aren't in Acapulco.
19. Maybe they aren't in Acapulco.
20. They might be in Cuernavaca.

THE PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE EL PROGRESIVO DEL ANTEPRESENTE

La forma progresiva del ante presente se construye con el tiempo presente del
verbo have y el participio del verbo be (been) seguido por el gerundio. Ejemplos:
She's been coming every day. Ella ha estado viniendo todos los días.
She hasn’t been coming every day. Ella no ha estado viniendo todos los
 días.
Has she been coming every day? Ha estado ella viniendo ella todos los
días?
Hasn’t she been coming every day? ¿No ha estado ella viniendo todos los
días?

LA FORMA PROGRESIVA DEL ANTEPRESENTE CON UN ELEMENTO DE TIEMPO

Con la forma progresiva del antepresente también se emplean las palabras for y
since para expresar complementos de tiempo. Se emplea la palabra for (hace,
desde hace) para especificar el plazo de tiempo y since (desde, desde que)
para indicar cuándo comenzó la acción.
How long has he been studying ¿hace cuánto tiempo él ha estado
English? estudiando inglés?
He's been studying English for six Él ha estado estudiando inglés por seis
months. meses.
He's been studying English since Él ha estado estudiando inglés desde
January. enero.
He's been studying Spanish since he came to Él ha estado estudiando español desde que vino a
Mexico. México.

EXERCISE 2. Verb Practice.

1. She's been working in the bank for two years.
2. She hasn't been working in the bank for two years.
3. Has she been working in the bank for two years?
4. Hasn't she been working in the bank for two years?
5. Why has she been working in the bank for two years?

EXERCISE 3. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs live, play, smoke, read, ride, dance,
examine, talk, eat. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in the
exercise above. Practice ending the sentences with phrases beginning with both for
and since. Use a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative
words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 4. Translate the following sentences. Change them lo the present perfect
progressive.
1. It's snowed all day.
2. We’ve saved our money since we got married.
3. They’ve traveled for two years.
4. She's cleaned the silver every day for a week.
5. He's taken care of the store since he was seventeen.
6. I've played basketball since I was ten.
7. The sun has shone since noon.
8. The wind has blown for two days.
9. We've listened to the radio all day.
10. They've waited for me since five o'clock.
THE PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE EL PROGRESIVO DEL ANTECOPRETÉRITO
La forma progresiva del antecopretérito se construye con el tiempo pasado del
verbo have (had) y el participio del verbo be (been) seguido por un gerundio.
Ejemplos:
She'd been coming every day. Ella había estado viniendo todos los
días.
She hadn't been coming every day. Ella no había estado viniendo todos
los días.
Had she been coming every day? ¿Había ella estado viniendo todos los
días?
Hadn’t she been coming every day? ¿No había ella estado viniendo todos
los días?

LA FORMA PROGRESIV A DEL ANTECOPRETERITO CON UN ELEMENTO DE

TIEMPO
Con la forma progresiva del antecopretérito también se emplean las palabras for y
since para expresar complementos de tiempo. Se emplea for (hace, desde hace)
para especificar el plazo de tiempo y since (desde, desde que) para indicar cuándo
empezó la acción.
How long had he been studying English? ¿Cuánto tiempo había él estado estudiando
inglés?
He'd been studying English for six Él había estado estudiando inglés hace
months. seis meses.
He'd been studying English since Él había estado estudiando inglés
January. desde enero.
He'd been studying English s i nc e he came É l h a b í a e s t a d o e s t u d i a n d o i n g l é s d e s d e q u e v i n o
to Mexico. a México.

EXERCISE 5. Verb Practice.

1. They'd been talking to me since ten-thirty.
2. They hadn’t been talking to me since ten-thirty.
3. Had they been talking to me since ten-thirty?
4. Hadn't they been talking to me since ten-thirty?
5. Why had they been talking to me since ten-thirty?

EXERCISE 6. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs write, speak, steal, swim, dress, rest,
dig, save, hide. Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in the
exercise above. Practice ending the sentences with phrases beginning with both for
and since. Use a different t noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative
words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 7. Change the sentences in exercise 4 to the past perfect progressive

and translate the following sentences,
1. I hope see you at the party.
2. I hope it stops raining.
3. I hope it isn't cold tomorrow.
4. I hope we can finish the book this year.
5. I hope you have a nice time.
6.Que pases felices vacaciones
7. iQue. tengas muchos niños
8. iQue la tormenta termine pronto
9. iQue tengas un cumpleaños muy feliz
10. iQue te mejores pronto

EXERCISE 9. Translate the following sentences. Change the second verb of the
sentence to the negative and Translate again.
1. I wish you'd listen to your parents.
2. I wish you'd stay in Mexico until Christmas.
3. I wish you'd hurry.
4. I wish you'd wear your new skirt.
5. I wish you'd put on your coat.
6. I wish you'd pick up these papers.
7. I wish you'd come back tomorrow.
8. I wish you'd go to the movies.
9. I wish you'd swim in the lake.
10. I wish you'd ask your father.

EXERCISE 10. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,
interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. They pay attention to the teacher.
2. They paid attention to the movie.
3. She'll pay attention to me.
4. You've paid attention to everything I said.
5. He wants me to pay attention to the lesson.
6. They told her to pay attention to her parents.
7. The boys paid attention to what he said.
8. Children like to pay attention to their brothers and sisters.
9. We'll be able to pay attention to him.
10. They should pay attention when he talks.

EXERCISE 11. Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
1. Do you want me to pay attention to you?
2. Did you tell them to pay attention to the teacher?
3. Are you going to pay attention to what he says?
4. Were you paying attention when Mr. Wilson spoke?
5. Are you paying attention now?
6. Would you pay attention if I told you a story?
7. Should you pay attention to your mother?
8. Have you been paying attention?
9. Do you always pay attention to your lesson?
10. Did they make you pay attention?

EXERCISE 12 Translate into Spanish.

1. Stop talking and pay attention to what I'm saying.
2. I won't go to the movies on Sunday if I have to stand in line.
3. They went on talking after the teacher came into the room.
4. how many mistakes did you make in your homework?
5. I'm so tired and thirsty that I don't think I can walk any farther.
6. By the time we got to the party all the food had been eaten.
7. I wish you'd shut up and let me think.
8. how often do you have a cold?
9. Helen took care of Margaret’s baby while she stood in line.
10. When the boys found out that they were going to be punished, they ran away.
11. I'd rather work all day than go shopping at Christmas time.
12. That store plans to give away two radios on Christmas Eve.
13. If you stopped talking maybe you'd be able to pay attention to what I'm telling
you.
14. That stove isn't worth anything. Why don't you get rid of it?
15. The noise died down as soon as I went into the room.

EXERCISE 13. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Breathe. Close. Carry. Drop. Burn. Complete. Cover. Dictate. Cross. Change.
Capture. Dress. Call. Correct. Cook. Disappear. Clean. Clap. Count. Dance.

EXERCISE 14. Give the past tense and past participle of the following Verbs.
Bring. Blow. Come. Back. Dig. Buy. Build. Cut. Drive. Begin. Bleed. Catch. Draw.
Become. Bet. Do. Eat. Break. Come. Drink. Freeze.

EXERCISE 15. Verb Practice Expand the following verb practice to include different
tenses.
1. That bus will be able to cross the street at the next comer.
2. That bus won't be able to cross the street at the next comer.
3. Will that bus be able to cross the street at the next comer?
4. Won't that bus be able to cross the street at the next comer?
5. Why won't that bus be able to cross the street at the next comer?

EXERCISE 16. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs paint, freeze, attack, wrap, wrap
(something) up, sound, stand in line, go on, make a mistake. Expand each verb
practice to include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use a different noun
or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is possible.

EXERCISE 17. Read and translate.

THE LITTLE RED SHOES
In 1674 a little girl named Sally Coleman lived in Hatfield, Massachusetts. One day
in the fall of that year little Sally was the proudest child in the whole colony because
she was the owner of a pair of new shoes. She was especially proud of these shoes
because they were as red as the berries that grew in the woods near the town. Sally
liked her shoes so much that she kept them near her bed at night when she went to
sleep. Then one night a group of Indians attacked the town. Houses were burned,
men and women were killed, and many others were taken away by the Indians. As
Sally left the house, she picked up her red shoes and took them with her; and as
she walked through the snow, she was glad that she had remembered to take her
red shoes. Sally's courage and patience during the long, cold trip that followed won
the sympathy of an Indian named Painted Arrow; and although sick and weak
prisoners were left behind to die of cold or hunger, this savage friend often carried
Sally in his arms when she was too tired to walk any farther. When they had to cross
rivers, he swam in the cold water beside Sally's canoe to keep it from turning over;
and whenever he was lucky with his bow and arrow, he always gave her part of his
bear meat. As the prisoners went on toward Canada, they found the water of Lake
Champlain frozen solid. Painted Arrow wrapped Sally in his own blanket and some
animal skins and, after building a sled, pulled her to the other side of the lake.
Three months of travel still hadn't worn out the little red shoes; and while Sally was
a captive of the Indians, Painted Arrow fixed them with deerskin. Later, after Sally
was sold to the French as a slave, ribbon from France was put around the edges of
the little shoes. By the time Sally was returned to her people in June, 1678, the little
shoes had traveled six hundred miles; and if you visit the Old South Church in
Boston, you can still see them there, the little red shoes with such an interesting
history.

EXERCISE 18. Write in English.

1. ¿Cuánto tiempo hace que vives en la misma casa? Hace más de (than) once
años.
2. Llevo todo el día envolviendo regalos de Navidad.
3. No podremos pintar la casa hasta que deje de llover.
4. Aunque sabíamos que haría frío en Chicago, no llevamos nuestros abrigos (de
invierno).
5. No dejes de hablar solamente porque cometiste un error.
6. Fuiste al centro la Nochebuena? No, no quería.
7. El agua del lago ha estado congelada todo el invierno.
8. Los niños habían estado jugando desde temprano en la mañana.
9. Quizá las veamos la víspera del Año Nuevo.
10. Puede ser que haga demasiado frío para salir sin abrigo.

EXERCISE 19. Dictation.

1. She's been speaking English for three years.
2. It's been raining all day.
3. I wish you wouldn't cross the street until the cars stop.
4. It’ll be time to eat by the time we finish.
5. Next time I hope you pay attention to me.
6. Do you know where the largest market in Mexico is?
7. you'll get hurt if you aren’t careful.
8. We returned the books when we got through with them.
9. I plan to stop working in another year or two.
10. how long ago did you buy that suit?
EXERCISE 20. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in
the negative.
1. Do you know where we are?
2. Do you know who he is?
3. Do you know where they are?
4. Do you know what time it is?
5. Do you know what his name is?
6. Did you know where we were?
7. Did you know who he was?
8. Did you know what time it was?
Answer the following questions.
9. how long has it been since he sold his car?
10. how long has it been since you had a vacation?
11. how long has it been since you read a good book?
12. how long has it been since you saw that movie?
13. how long has it been since you were in the United States?
14. how long has it been since you ate downtown?
15. how long had it been since he saw his mother?
16. how long had it been since he ate French food?
17. how long have you been speaking French?
18. how long have they been waiting for us?
19. how long had John been waiting when it began to rain?
Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in the negative.
20. Have you been working all day?
21. Have you been eating Mexican food?
22. Have you been listening to the radio?
23. Have you been watching television?
24. Has he been speaking Spanish?
25. Has he been living in France?
26. Have they been making a cake?
27. Have they been smoking?
28. Have they been making a lot of money?
29. Have they been paying attention?
30. Have they been standing in line?
LESSON 19.
VOCABULARY.
1. to s ew , s ew e d, coser 13. art arte
se we d
2. to w ea ve , wov e, tejer (en telar) 14. center centro
w ov e n
to k ni t, k ni tte d, tejer (con aguas) 15. cloth tela
kni tte d
3. to admire, admired, admirar 16. needle aguja
admired
4. to include, included, incluir 17. thread hilo
included
5. to j oi n, j oi ne d, juntar 18. contest competencia
j oi ne d
6. to tear, tore, rasgar 19. heaven cielo
torn
7. immediately inmediatamente 20. spider araña
8. wonderful maravilloso 21. spider web telaraña
9. natural natural cobweb telaraña
10.jealous celoso 22. fly mosca.
11. guilt culpa 23. butterfly mariposa
guilty culpable 24. worm gusano
12. warning Advertencia. 25. earth tierra

IDIOMS.
1. to make fun of burlarse de
2. to go with Ir con
I went downtown with my mother . Fui al centro con mi madre
3. to throw (something) away tirar algo
Throw it away. Tíralo
4. to take a bath Tomar un baño
to take a shower Tomar un baño (en regadera)
5. to be guilty ser culpable
6. shades of color Matices de color.
7. a bad cold un fuerte catarro
a bad cough una tos fuerte
a sore throat un dolor de garganta

EXERCISE 1. Translate the following sentences and practice reading them.

1. They may sing later.
2. They may not sing later.
3. They might sing some more.
4. They might not sing any more.
5. Maybe they'll sing that song again.
6. Maybe they won't sing that song again.
7. Cross here.
8. Don't cross here.
9. Let's cross here.
10. Let's not cross here.
11. Let him cross there.
12. Don't let him cross there.
13. Let her cross too.
14. Don’t let her cross either.
15. Let them cross there.
16. Don't let them cross there.
17. What are you thinking about?
18. What are you talking about?
19. Who are you going to go with?
20. Who did you go with?

SUPPLEMENTARYVOCABULARY
1. addition adición 29. insult insulto
2. additional adicional 30. insulting insultante
3. agreement acuerdo 31. knitting tejido
4. agreeable agradable 32. notice aviso
5. attack ataque 33. noticeable notable
6. admiration admiración 34. name nombre
7. admirable admirable 35. punishment castigo
8. annoying molesto 36. preparation preparación
9. bet apuesta 37. painter pintor
10. bother molestia 38. paint pintura
11. breath aliento 39. painting pintura
12.. breathing respiración 40. realization realización
13. cook cocinero 41. repetition repetición
14. cooking cocina 42. rent renta
15. cost costo 43. smile sonrisa
16. costly costoso 44. smiling sonriente
17. choice elección 45. satisfaction satisfacción
18. cross cruz 46. satisfactory satisfactorio
19. crossing crucero 47. smell olor
20. discovery descubrimiento 48. surprise sorpresa
21. drawing dibujo 49. smoke humo
22. examination examen 50. sound sonido
23. explanation explicación 51. sewing costura
24. expression expresión 52. wish deseo
25. expectation expectación 53. weave tejido
26. failure fracaso 54. weaving Tejer.
27. drunkard borracho 55. weaver tejedor
28. drunk borracho

EXERCISE 2. Translate the following sentences.

1. Have they reached an agreement?
2. Was the attack made by the Indians?
3. I have a lot of admiration for that person.
4. The bet he won was not large.
5. Students who always talk are annoying.
6. I knew by his breathing that he was asleep.
7. my mother is a good cook.
8. Everybody likes Mexican cooking.
9. You made a good choice when you chose that teacher.
10. There's a cross on the church.
11. I'll get off when the bus comes to the crossing.
12. The discovery of America was made by a man named Columbus.
13. Do you study drawing at school?
14. The examination was very difficult.
15. Did you understand the explanation?
16. That man is a complete failure.
17. Her father was a drunkard.
18. Did you read the notice on the war?
19. Her Spanish accent is very noticeable.
20. There's a lot of smoke in this room.
21. We listened, but we couldn't hear a sound.
22. This dress has a very fine weave.
23. Weaving is done by the Women and children.
24. He spoke to me in a very insulting way.

EXERCISE 3. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. I've been admiring your new dress.
2. Alice has been sewing for two hours.
3. We've been examining the new dishes.
4. She's been expecting you.
5. The girls have been knitting sweaters.
6. They've been preparing the fish for dinner.
7. The pupils have been repeating the verbs.
8. C1habk in thYc', ar seen smo too much.
9. Anne has been feeling bad all week.
10. You've been talking to the teacher.

EXERCISE 4. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. They've been living in Mexico for a year.
2. Charles had been sleeping for three hours when his father woke him up.
3. I've been waiting for you for more than an hour.
4. She's been studying English a long time.
5. Her husband had been working in Mexico four months when he was sent to
Europe.
6. My mother has been washing since eight o'clock this morning.
7. He's been feeling well all day.
8. They've been writing since early this morning.
9. My brother has been waiting for more than an hour.
10. Mary had been reading the newspaper for an hour when her mother came home.

EXERCISE 5. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. The boys made fun of that old man.
2. The children are making fun of that beggar.
3. Bill makes fun of the way I speak English.
4. The girls made fun of the dresses worn in 1925.
5. My wife makes fun of my old car.
6. He's making fun of me.
7.They'll make fun of your funny hat.
8. They like to make fun of American movies.
9. She made fun of the book he wrote.
10. They're making fun of him.

EXERCISE 6. Translate the following sentences. Change them to the negative,

interrogative, and interrogative negative.
1. He takes a bath every morning.
2. They took a bath in cold water.
3. We took a bath in the sea.
4. She's taken two baths today.
5. I'll take a bath before I go to the movies.
6. You're going to take a shower now.
7. They were going to take a shower early.
8. He's taking a shower in hot water.
9. She'd take a shower if she had time.
10. They should take a shower every day.

EXERCISE 7. Translate into Spanish.

1. Aren't you ashamed to make fun of my paintings?
2. I have to go with him, so he won't get lost.
3. If those papers aren't any good, throw them away.
4. Do you want to take a shower before you go to the movies?
5. He has a bad cold and a sore throat.
6. He turned off the water while I was taking a shower.
7. I told him to get rid of that dog.
8. We've just painted the bedroom.
9. you should pay attention to what he says.
10. Diamonds are worth a lot of money.
11. I'd rather stay at home than go to that party.
12. The wind died down as soon as the storm was over.
13. I won't go to the football game if I have to stand in line to buy a ticket.
14. I won't have time to go with you tomorrow.
15. Helen Wood knows how to knit beautiful socks.
EXERCISE 8. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Die. Examine. Fix. Help. Drown. Explain. Form. Hurry. Decide. Express. Fail. Hunt.
Discover. Expect. Follow. Hope. Escape. Finish. Fool. Insult.

EXERCISE 9. Give the past tense and past participle of the following verbs.
Feel. Go. Go to bed. Get hurt. Fly. Go back. Go shopping. Get dark. Fall. Go with.
Give. Get light. Feed. Goon. Get. Get better. Fight. Go to sleep. Get mad (at). Get
worse.

EXERCISE 10. Expand the following verb practice to include different

1.Mrs. White's daughter is sewing, isn't he? cl
2. Mrs. White's daughter isn't sewing, is she?
3. Is Mrs. White's daughter sewing?
4. Isn't Mrs. White's daughter sewing?
5. Why isn't Mrs. White's daughter sewing?

EXERCISE 11. Verb Practice.

Make short sentences with forms of the verbs weave, knit, admire, include, join,
tear, go with, throw (something) away, take a bath, take a shower, make fun of.
Expand each verb practice to include different tenses, as in the exercise above. Use
a different noun or pronoun with each verb. Use the interrogative words when it is
possible.

EXERCISE 12. Read and translate.

THE CONTEST.
Minerva, the goddess of the art of weaving, heard about a girl named Arachne, who
could weave so well that everyone around her stopped whatever they were doing to
watch her work and admire the beautiful things she made. The delicate colors of the
beautiful threads formed pictures which were so natural that the people thought the
goddess Minerva herself must have taught her how to weave. But Arachne said that
she was not a pupil of the goddess. "I can weave better than Minerva," said
Arachne, "and if she wants to have a contest with me, let her come; and I'll show her
whose work is more beautiful." When Minerva heard this, she got very angry
Arachne’s words were an insult, so Minerva went to Arachne and told her that the
contest would begin immediately. Each began her work at once. The weavers'
fingers flew over the cloth and among the beautiful threads, joining the delicate
shades of color in such a way that the eye could not see where the colors changed.
* Minerva wove things of the powers in heaven and in the sea and on the earth. The
center of her cloth was wonderful to look at, and each corner she formed pictures
showing the punishment of those who had made the gods angry. This was meant as
a warning for Arachne to give up the contest. But Arachne did not stop. She filled
her cloth with pictures showing the mistakes of the gods. Minerva could not keep
from admiring her work; but because she thought the things Arachne had woven
were an insult or, perhaps, because she was a little jealous of Arachne's fine
weaving, she hit the cloth with her needle and tore it to pieces. In this way she
made Arachne realize her guilt for insulting the gods. "Live, guilty woman," said
Minerva, as she changed Arachne into a spider, "and so that you can remember the
lesson that I have taught you, you will forever weave spider webs in which you will
hang for all future time. "

EXERCISE 13. Write in English.

1. ¿Cómo rasgó su falda?
2. Hacía veinte minutos que te estábamos esperando cuando empezó a llover.
3. No te burles de cómo él habla inglés.
4. ¿Cuánto tiempo hace desde que leíste este libro?
5. ¿Cuánto tiempo te tardas en tejer un par de calcetines?
6. Oscurece temprano en enero.
7. ¿Para qué dejaste de fumar? ¿Ya no te gusta?
8. ¿Recuerdas dónde dejé mi bolsa?
9. Tal vez llueva antes de que lleguemos a casa.
10. Mi hermano fuma desde que cumplió los quince años.

EXERCISE 14. Dictation.

1. Would you rather have fried eggs or scrambled eggs?
2. Do you know where he was born?
3. It doesn't make any difference what he thinks.
4. He likes chocolate cake better than anything else.
5. If you have a cold, don't take a shower in cold water.
6. Let's stop working for a few minutes and have some coffee.
7. Don’t throw those things away. you might need them some day.
8. All the clouds have disappeared.
9. Do you think that I can rent a house for a thousand pesos?
10. I have a bad cough.

EXERCISE 15. Conversation Answer the following questions in the affirmative and in
the negative.
1. Are you making fun of me? 11. Do you take a shower every
morning?
2. Were you making fun of their car? 12. Did you take a shower in cold
water?
3. Did you make fun of her hat? 13. Would you take a shower if you had
a cold?
4. Did you go with your mother? 14. Do you know what time it is?
5. Will you go with me? 15. Do you know where the market is?
6. Are you going with your friends? 16. Do you know how old I am?
7. Do you have to go with your father? 17. Do you know how far we walked?
8. Did you throw away those letters? 18. Do you know when my birthday is?
9. Are you going to throw away those old 19. Do you know where we are?
clothes?
10. Will you throw away these old 20. Do you know who I am?
books?

Answer the following questions.

21. how far is it from here downtown?
22. how far is it from my house to your house?
23. how far is it from here to Texas?
24. how long ago did you learn how to drive?
25. how long ago did you paint the house?
26. how long ago did you live in Monterrey?
27. how long ago did you get married?
28. how long ago did you give a party?
29. how often do you go out of town?
30. how often do you go to the movies?
31. how long has it been since I saw you?
32. how long has it been since Mr. Smith died?
33. how long has it been raining?
34. how long has he been studying?
35. how long have they been waiting?